инструкцияKyocera FS-1128MFP
Руководство по эксплуатации
F S —110 0
FS —130 0D
870CKGB20008
*870CKGB20008*
Посмотреть инструкция для Kyocera FS-1128MFP бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории принтеры, 6 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 8. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: русский. У вас есть вопрос о Kyocera FS-1128MFP или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь
- Комплект руководств
- Условные обозначения по технике безопасности в этом руководстве
- Содержание
- Наклейки с предостережениями и предупреждениями
- Меры предосторожности при установке
- Меры предосторожности при эксплуатации
- Меры безопасности при работе с лазером
- Меры безопасности при отсоединении аппарата от сети питания
- Законодательные ограничения на копирование и сканирование
- Правовая информация и правила техники безопасности
- 1 Наименования компонентов
- 2 Подготовка к использованию
- 3 Основные операции
- 4 Уход и обслуживание
- 5 Устранение неисправностей
- Приложение
- Алфавитный указатель
Главная
Kyocera | |
FS-1128MFP | 1102JN3EU0 | |
принтер | |
632983012352, 6329830123524, 0632983012352 | |
русский | |
Руководство пользователя (PDF), Вопросы и ответы (PDF), Буклет по продукции (PDF), Правила техники безопасности (PDF), Техническая спецификация (PDF) |
Печать
Максимальное разрешение | 1200 x 1200 DPI |
Скорость печати (ч/б, обычное кач., A4/US Letter) | 28 ppm |
Время выхода первой страницы (ч/б, норм. качество) | 6 s |
Время разогрева | 15 s |
Технология печати | Лазерная |
Печать | Нет |
Двусторонняя печать | Да |
Свойства
Цвета печати | Черный |
Максимальный рабочий цикл | 20000 стр/мес |
Языки описания страницы | PCL 5e, PCL 6, PCL XL |
Цифровой передатчик | Нет |
Сканирование
Поддерживаемые форматы изображения | JPG, TIF |
Сканировать в | FTP |
Разрешение оптического сканирования | — DPI |
Шкала уровней серого цвета | 256 |
Сканирование | цветное сканирование |
Двустороннее сканирование | Да |
Копирование
Максимальное разрешение копирования | 600 x 600 DPI |
Время выхода первой копии (черный, норм. качество) | 6.9 s |
Максимальное число копий | 999 копий |
Масштабирование копии | 25 — 400 % |
Копирование | Черно-белое копирование |
Дуплексное копирование | Да |
Факс
Скорость модема | 33.6 кбит/с |
Память факса | 100 страниц |
Скорость передачи факса | 3 с/стор |
Методы кодирования факса | JBIG, MMR (Fax coding method), MR |
Факс | Черно-белый |
Дуплексная передача по факсу | Да |
Входная и выходная емкость
Общий объем вывода бумаги | 150 листов |
Маскимальная вместимость на входе | 800 листов |
Общий объем подачи бумаги | — листов |
Производительность
Модель процессора | 440 |
Тактовая частота процессора | 667 MHz |
Оперативная память | 256 MB |
Совместимость с Mac | Да |
Максимальный объём внутренней памяти | 768 MB |
Встроенный кардридер | Нет |
Уровень звукового давления (копирование) | 52 dB |
Уровень давления звука (режим ожидания) | 30 dB |
Встроенный процессор | Да |
Семейство процессоров | PowerPC |
Прочие свойства
Максимальная внутренняя память | 0.768 GB |
Совместимые операционные системы | Windows 2000/XP/Server 2000/Server 2003/ Vista/Server 2008, MAC OS 9.X, MAC OS X, Linux |
Размеры (ШхГхВ) | 494 x 410 x 366 mm |
Индивидуальные размеры | 105 x 148mm/216 x 356mm |
Требования к питанию | AC 220 — 240 V, 50/60Hz |
Мультифункциональсть устройства | Copy, Fax, Scan |
Функции МФУ в цвете | scan, n |
Поддержка сети | Да |
Эмуляции | PCL 6, PCL 5e, Postscript 3 (KPDL3), Lineprinter, IBM Proprinter X24, EPSON LQ 850, DIABLO630, PRESCRIBE, PDF, XPS |
Типы и характеристики бумаги
Максимальные размеры печати | 216 x 356 мм |
ISO A-форматы (А0…А9) | A4, A5, A6 |
ISO B-форматы (B0…B9) | B5 |
Типы материалов для печати | Конверты |
Размеры бумаги не соответствующие стандарту ISO | Folio |
Типы носителей многоцелевого лотка | Конверты |
Вес лотка подачи материалов для печати | 60 — 120 g/m² |
Плотность носителей универсального лотка | 60 — 220 g/m² |
Плотность носителей для двусторонней печати | 60 — 105 g/m² |
Максимальный размер бумаги ISO A-формата | A4 |
Порты и интерфейсы
Стандартные интерфейсы | USB 2.0 |
Прямая печать | Да |
Количество портов USB 2.0 | 1 |
USB порт | Да |
Вес и размеры
Энергопитание
Потребляемая мощность (режим экономии энергии) | 10.2 W |
Потребляемая мощность (в режим ожидания) | 91 W |
Средняя потребляемая мощность (в рабочем режиме) | 494 W |
Сертификаты
Дизайн
Дисплей | — |
Позиционирование на рынке | Бизнес |
Сеть
Подключение Ethernet | Да |
Wi-Fi | Нет |
Поддерживаемые сетевые протоколы (IPv6) | SNMPv3, SSL, IPsec |
Устойчивость
Сертификаты устойчивого развития | ENERGY STAR |
Логистические данные
Код гармонизированной системы описания (HS) | 84433100 |
показать больше
Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Kyocera FS-1128MFP.
Какой вес Kyocera FS-1128MFP?
Kyocera FS-1128MFP имеет вес 15000 g.
Как удалить замятую бумагу из принтера?
Лучше всего аккуратно вытянуть бумагу из принтера. Выключите принтер и убедитесь, что печатающий узел не нависает над бумагой и что в принтере не осталось бумаги.
Почему после установки оригинального картриджа принтер не работает?
Принтер может не распознать неоригинальный картридж. В этом случае вы получите сообщение о том, что картридж пуст. В инструкции к приобретенному картриджу обычно указаны способы устранения проблемы. Если это сделать не удалось, рекомендуется обратиться к продавцу.
Чем обусловлено плохое качество печати?
Причины плохого качества печати могут быть разными. Убедитесь, что картридж заполнен, а тонер имеется в достаточном количестве. Если такой проблемы нет, причина может заключаться в том, что струйному принтеру требуется чистка, высох картридж или сломан печатающий узел. Для лазерного принтера рекомендуется выполнить калибровку.
В чем разница между лазерным и струйным принтером?
Лазерный принтер печатает тонером, а струйный — чернилами.
Почему при печати на струйном принтере появляются черные полосы?
В большинстве случаев это обусловлено поломкой картриджа струйного принтера. Необходимо заменить картридж.
Что означает аббревиатура DPI?
DPI обозначает Dots Per Inch и представляет собой количество капель чернил (на дюйм), которые подаются на бумагу при печати.
Какие сертификаты Kyocera FS-1128MFP имеет?
Kyocera FS-1128MFP имеет следующие сертификаты: TÜV/GS, CE.
Инструкция Kyocera FS-1128MFP доступно в русский?
Да, руководствоKyocera FS-1128MFP доступно врусский .
Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь
- Manuals
- Brands
- Kyocera Manuals
- All in One Printer
- FS-1128MFP
- Operation manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
OPERATION GUIDE
FS-1100
FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP
FS-1300D
Related Manuals for Kyocera FS-1128MFP
Summary of Contents for Kyocera FS-1128MFP
-
Page 1
OPERATION GUIDE FS-1100 FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP FS-1300D… -
Page 2
Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition. -
Page 3: Safety Conventions In This Guide
Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
-
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Caution / Warning Labels …………v Installation Precautions .
-
Page 5
Contents Job Finish Notice…………4-16 File Name Entry . -
Page 6
Contents Maintenance Cleaning …………..9-2 Toner Container . -
Page 7: Caution / Warning Labels
Caution / Warning Labels Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner. Laser inside the machine (Laser radiation warning) For U.S.A.
-
Page 8: Installation Precautions
Installation Precautions Environment CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the machine.
-
Page 9: Other Precautions
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant.
-
Page 10: Precautions For Use
Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside. Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine.
-
Page 11: Cleaning
If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
-
Page 12: Toner Container
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. If using the FS-1128MFP the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
-
Page 13
Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. -
Page 14: Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.
-
Page 15: Safety Instructions Regarding The Disconnection Of Power (Europe)
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß…
-
Page 16: Safety Of Laser Beam (Usa)
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance.
-
Page 17: Optical Unit
3. Optical unit When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit. 4. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 18: Safety Instructions Regarding The Disconnection Of Power (Usa)
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.
-
Page 19
(1) year, or 100,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. -
Page 20: Legal Restriction On Copying/Scanning
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning • It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. • Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned.
-
Page 21: Legal And Safety Information
Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. • Legal Information …………xx • Regarding Trade Names……….xxi • Energy Saving Control Function ……..xxv • Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ……. xxv •…
-
Page 22: Legal Information
Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 23: Regarding Trade Names
Regarding Trade Names • PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. • KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. • Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
-
Page 24
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access “http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available. Open SSLeay License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. -
Page 25: Original Ssleay License
Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;…
-
Page 26
Monotype Imaging License Agreement Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. -
Page 27: Energy Saving Control Function
Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.
-
Page 28: About This Operation Guide
About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters. Chapter 1 — Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 2 — Preparation before Use Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 3 — Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
-
Page 29: Conventions In This Guide
Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key. keys or a computer screen. [Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Select [System].
-
Page 30
xxviii OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 31: Part Names
1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys. • Operation Panel …………1-2 • Machine …………….1-4 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 32: Operation Panel
Used to call destinations registered to the one-touch key numbers (1 to 22). Shifts to switch the one-touch key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to 22). Lamp is lit while shifted (12 to 22). FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 33
Part Names Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when Clears entered numbers and characters. entering characters, change a value, etc. Resets settings and displays the Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered basic screen. value. Turns the machine on/off. Also used Displays the function menu for copy, to put it into or recover it from sleep mode. -
Page 34: Machine
Part Names Machine Original Cover (For FS-1028MFP only) Platen Original Size Indicator Plate Operation Panel Top Cover Front Cover Drum Unit Main Charger Cleaner Lock Lever Toner Container OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 35
Part Names Top Tray Paper Length Guide Paper Stopper Paper Width Guides Cassette Paper Width Guides (MP Tray) MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray MP Tray Extension OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 36
Part Names Anchor Pin USB Interface Connector Network Interface Connector Rear Cover Main Power Switch Power Cord Connector OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 37: Preparation Before Use
2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals. • Check bundled items …………2-2 • Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables..2-3 •…
-
Page 38: Check Bundled Items
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Documents KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide…
-
Page 39: Determining The Connection Method And Preparing Cables
Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP. TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 40: Preparing Necessary Cables
/Network FAX* 100Base-TX, Shielded) Printer/TWAIN USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable Scanning/WIA (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Scanning Max. 5.0 m, Shielded) Network FAX and FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 41: Connecting Cables
Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine. Turn the main power switch off (O). Connect the machine to the PC or your network device. When using the network interface, remove the cap.. Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
-
Page 42
Preparation before Use Turn the main power switch on (|). The machine begins to warm up. When connecting the network cable, configure the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-12. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 43: Switching The Language For Display [Language]
Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display. Use the procedure below to select the language. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
-
Page 44
Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 45: Setting Date And Time
Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message.
-
Page 46: Date Format
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [Date Setting]. A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID Login User Name: L b and password to log in. ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login Press the OK key. The Date Setting menu appears. Date Setting: Date/Time *********************…
-
Page 47: Time Zone
Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. Press the key to select [Date/Time]. Date Setting: Date/Time ********************* Date Format Time Zone [ Exit Press the OK key. Date/Time appears. Date/Time: Year Month 2009 (Time Zone:Tokyo Press the…
-
Page 48: Network Setup (Lan Cable Connection)
Preparation before Use Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms. This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures.
-
Page 49
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have Administrator only. logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. The default settings of the login user name and login password are both 2800. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. -
Page 50: Ipv6 Setting
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. Press the key to select [IPv4 Setting]. TCP/IP Settings: a b TCP/IP ********************* IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting [ Exit…
-
Page 51: Default Gateway
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Press the key to select [IP Address]. IPv4 Setting: DHCP Bonjour ********************* IP Address [ Exit Press the OK key.
-
Page 52: Subnet Mask
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears. Subnet Mask: 123.145.167.189 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Press the key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask.
-
Page 53
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is [On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) to Off. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. -
Page 54
Preparation before Use DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. -
Page 55
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. -
Page 56
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. DHCP appears. DHCP: 2 *On ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. -
Page 57
Preparation before Use In the System menu, press the key to select System: [Network Setting]. Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk… -
Page 58: Appletalk Setup
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears. IPv4 Setting: DHCP Bonjour ********************* IP Address [ Exit Press the key to select [Bonjour]. Press the OK key. Bonjour appears. Bonjour: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key.
-
Page 59
Preparation before Use In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [System], and then press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have Administrator only. logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. -
Page 60: Installing Software
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep Mode before continuing. See Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. 2-24…
-
Page 61: Command Center (Settings For E-Mail)
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct password to access pages other than the startup page. The default setting is admin00. The password can be changed. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 62: Sending E-Mail
Preparation before Use Sending E-mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following: •…
-
Page 63
Preparation before Use Enter the correct settings in each field. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. Item Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25. -
Page 64: Loading Paper
Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2). Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
-
Page 65: Loading Paper In The Cassettes
Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m The following paper sizes are supported: Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Executive, Statement, A4, B5, A5, A6, Folio, and 16K.
-
Page 66
Preparation before Use Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab on the left guide and slide the guides to the paper size required. NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette. -
Page 67
Preparation before Use Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded, curled, or damaged. IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide. •… -
Page 68: Loading Paper In The Multi Purpose Tray
Preparation before Use There is a paper gauge on the left side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the pointer will go down to the level of (empty). NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage…
-
Page 69
Preparation before Use Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. Pull out the subtray. Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. -
Page 70: Loading Envelopes
Preparation before Use Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper.
-
Page 71
Preparation before Use Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. Pull out the subtray. Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. -
Page 72
Preparation before Use Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. For landscape form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing towards you. -
Page 73
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face. NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying… -
Page 74: Specifying Paper Size And Media
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
-
Page 75
Preparation before Use In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User Property Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. -
Page 76
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears. Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* Legala Statementa Press the key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. -
Page 77
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. -
Page 78: User Property
Preparation before Use When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************** Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login Password: NOTE: [ Menu ] [ Login •…
-
Page 79
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears. MP Tray Size: 1 *Lettera ********************* Legala Statementa Press the key to select the desired paper Others: size and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5a ********************* If you select [Others], select one of the other Envelope #10 options and then press the OK key. -
Page 80: Loading Originals
Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing. Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals. Open the original cover. NOTE: If the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed, open the document processor.
-
Page 81: Loading Originals In The Document Processor
Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Part Names of the Document Processor (1) Top cover (2) Original width guides (3) Original table (4) Original eject table (5) Original stopper…
-
Page 82
Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals. Place the originals. -
Page 83
3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations. • Power On/Off …………..3-2 • Auto Low Power Mode……….3-4 • Sleep and Auto Sleep ………..3-5 • Login/Logout …………..3-6 • One-Touch Keys and Program Keys……3-7 • Message Display…………3-8 • Copying……………..3-9 • Printing — Printing from Applications……3-18 •… -
Page 84: Basic Operation
Basic Operation Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit… Press the Power key. When the main power indicator is off… Turn the main power switch on. IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
-
Page 85: Power Off
If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
-
Page 86: Auto Low Power Mode
Basic Operation Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for 2 minutes. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 87: Sleep And Auto Sleep
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit. If you are using the FS-1128MFP, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be ready to operate in about 15 seconds.
-
Page 88: Login/Logout
Basic Operation Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine. NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
-
Page 89: One-Touch Keys And Program Keys
Basic Operation One-Touch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below. One-Touch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-124.
-
Page 90: Message Display
Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display. Ready to copy. Ready to send. Copies: Dest.: p :sally@kyoceramitaN 100% 1-sided Zoom [ Duplex ] [ Copier Screen Send Screen Reference Meaning number Indicates the current status of the machine.
-
Page 91: Copying
Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor.
-
Page 92: Adjusting Density
Basic Operation Press the Start key to start copying. Remove the finished copies from the top tray. Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.
-
Page 93: Selecting Image Quality
Basic Operation Press the OK key. Manual: When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press u Lighter -3 ********************* key to select your desired density and v Lighter -2 then press the OK key. w Lighter -1 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
-
Page 94: Zoom Copying
Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available. Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image Ledger: 129 % suitably to the selected paper size. Letter-R A3: 141 % Statement-R: 64 % A5: 70 % Zoom Entry…
-
Page 95
Basic Operation Model Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Metric Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), Models 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), (Asia 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.) Pacific) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >>… -
Page 96: Duplex Copying
Basic Operation Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Press the Start key. Copying begins. Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are available.
-
Page 97
Basic Operation Two-sided to Two-sided Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional document processor is required. NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, A4, Original Copy B5, A5 and Folio. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below. Press the Function Menu key. -
Page 98
Basic Operation If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the Orig. Binding: Right Select key) and you can select the binding 1 *o Left/Right ********************* edge of the original and the original setting orientation. p Top After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge Orig.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies, and the original 1 *c Top Edge Top… -
Page 99: Collate Copying
Basic Operation If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the Set original Right Select key). Copying begins. and press Start key. Job No.: 9999 Page(s): [ Cancel ] [End Scan] Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies. You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
-
Page 100: Printing — Printing From Applications
Basic Operation Printing — Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Library). Create a document using an application. Click File and select Print in the application.
-
Page 101
Basic Operation Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type. Click Source and select the paper source. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded… -
Page 102: Sending
Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
-
Page 103: Send As E-Mail
Basic Operation Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. NOTE: • You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN.
-
Page 104
Basic Operation If there are additional destinations, press the Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations. Press the key to select a destination and Dest. -
Page 105
Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder. • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. •… -
Page 106
Basic Operation Enter the path name. Consider, that the share name Path: but not the foldername on the destination pc has SD3\report* to be typed in. [ Text Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. Enter the login user name. You have to enter the Login User Name: account name of the destination pc. -
Page 107
Basic Operation For send to folder (SMB) Max. Item Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to Up to 64 (SMB)* receive the data. characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as Up to 128 follows. -
Page 108
Basic Operation If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 3 reappears. -
Page 109: Confirm Destination Screen
Basic Operation Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], Check through the all destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed. Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen. Press the key to check all destinations.
-
Page 110: Specifying Destination
Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys. Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. In the basic screen for sending, press the Address Select Addr Book: a b Book key.
-
Page 111
Basic Operation Search in Address Book In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select Menu: key). Menu appears. Select ********************* Detail Search(Name) Press the key to select [Search(Name)] Address Book: and then press the OK key. A search screen Design ********************* appears. -
Page 112
Basic Operation Enter the characters you want to search. Search(Name): If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and then the OK key, Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. Select the desired item for each and then press the OK Menu Text key. -
Page 113: Canceling Jobs
Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. During a printing or sending job, press the Stop Job Cancel List: key.
-
Page 114: Checking Remaining Toner And Paper
Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette. Checking Remaining Toner Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause ]…
-
Page 115: Program (Copying And Sending)
Basic Operation Program (Copying and Sending) Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys. Registering Settings After making settings, press and hold the one of the Registered.
-
Page 116
Basic Operation 3-34 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 117
4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying. • Original Size………………4-2 • Paper Selection………………4-4 • Original Orientation …………….4-8 • EcoPrint ………………… 4-10 • Combine Mode………………. 4-11 • Continuous Scan…………….4-15 • Job Finish Notice …………….4-16 •… -
Page 118: Copying Functions
Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process. The following options are available. Item How to Select Sizes Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Sizes standard sizes.
-
Page 119
Copying Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5q ********************* Envelope #10 Envelope #9 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Press the Start key to start copying. -
Page 120: Paper Selection
Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size. NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8). Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette. Press the Copy key.
-
Page 121
Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. How to Category Item Sizes Select Paper Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Size Sizes the standard… -
Page 122
Copying Functions Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears. Paper Selection g ********************* Collate Duplex [ Exit Press the key to select [Paper Selection]. Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears. Paper Selection: a b Auto ********************* A A4a Plain B A5a… -
Page 123
Copying Functions If Add paper in MP tray. is displayed during the copying process, add paper in the multi purpose tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then resumes. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 124: Original Orientation
Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions. • Duplex • Combine mode When placing originals on the platen [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] When placing originals on the optional document processor [Top Edge Left] [Top Edge Top] NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30.
-
Page 125
Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears. Paper Selection g ********************* Collate Duplex… -
Page 126: Ecoprint
Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen.
-
Page 127: Combine Mode
Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated. NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement and 16K.
-
Page 128
Copying Functions 4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE:… -
Page 129
Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available. None Solid Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. -
Page 130
Copying Functions Press the key to select the desired border Border Line: line type and then press the OK key. None ********************* l Solid Line m Dotted Line Press the key to select the orientation of Orig.Orientation: a b the original and then press the OK key. c Top Edge Top Completed. -
Page 131: Continuous Scan
Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
-
Page 132: Job Finish Notice
Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish. NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
-
Page 133
Copying Functions Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears. JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Press the key to select [Address Book] or Destination: [Address Entry], and then press the OK key. 1 *Address Book ********************* Address Entry… -
Page 134: File Name Entry
Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
-
Page 135: Print Override
Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job. NOTE: If the machine is left for 60 seconds in the interruption copy mode, the interrupt copy job is automatically canceled and the print job resumed.
-
Page 136
Copying Functions 4-20 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 137
5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. • Original Size…………..5-2 • Sending Size…………..5-4 • Zoom…………….5-6 • Duplex Sending………….5-7 • Original Orientation …………5-8 • File Format…………..5-10 • Original Image………….5-12 • Adjusting Density …………5-13 • Scan Resolution…………5-14 •… -
Page 138: Sending Functions
Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process. Choose the original size from the following groups of original size. Item Detail Size…
-
Page 139
Sending Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5q ********************* Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Envelope #10 the basic screen for sending. Envelope #9 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. -
Page 140: Sending Size
Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). The table below lists the sizes. Item Detail Size Standard Select from Same Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter, Sizes as Original Size or Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, Standard Size.
-
Page 141
Sending Functions Press the key to select [Sending Size]. Press the OK key. Sending Size appears. Sending Size: 1 *Same as OrigSize ********************* Letter Legal Press the key to select the desired sending size. If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options. -
Page 142: Zoom
Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size. The table below lists the available options. Item Detail 100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size) Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
-
Page 143: Duplex Sending
Sending Functions Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original. The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. Original Type Binding Binding 1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided — — 2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right, Top Edge Top, Binding Top…
-
Page 144: Original Orientation
Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. • 1-sided / 2-sided Selection When placing the original on the platen [Top Edge Top]…
-
Page 145
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. Orig.Orientation: a b c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* Press the key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. -
Page 146: File Format
Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send. The table below lists the file formats and their details. Adjustable range of image File Format Color mode quality 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale, Black 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) and White TIFF…
-
Page 147
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE 5-11… -
Page 148: Original Image
Sending Functions Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Item Detail Text+Photo Text and photos together. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Text Only text, no photos. Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals. Press the Send key.
-
Page 149: Adjusting Density
Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. The table below shows the available settings. Item Detail Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original. The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.
-
Page 150: Scan Resolution
Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
-
Page 151: Color / Grayscale / Black And White Selection
Sending Functions Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images. Press the Send key.
-
Page 152: Continuous Scan
Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
-
Page 153: File Name Entry
Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending. Press the Send key.
-
Page 154: Subject And Body Entry
Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the Send key.
-
Page 155: Wsd Scan
Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer. To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-132) must be set to [On] in the network settings. Procedure using computer Install the WIA driver on your computer in the custom mode from the supplied CD-ROM (Product…
-
Page 156
Sending Functions Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears. WSD Scan: From Computer From Oper. Panel ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [From Oper. Panel]. Select the destination computer from the computer Select Computer: a b list. P Computer01 ********************* Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the P Computer02… -
Page 157: Job Finish Notice
Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears.
-
Page 158
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address. 5-22 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 159: Ftp Encrypted Tx
Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE 5-23…
-
Page 160: Sanning Image Using Application
Sanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable and installthe Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide.
-
Page 161: Document Box
6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box. • Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory ….6-2 • Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ..6-4 • Removing USB Memory ……….6-6 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 162: Printing Documents Stored In Usb Memory
Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer. Limitations • The following file types can be printed: •…
-
Page 163
Document Box Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed. Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected USB Memory: file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it. -
Page 164: Storing Documents
Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format. NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100. Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
-
Page 165
Document Box IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory, ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-6. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 166: Removing Usb Memory
Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. Press the Document Box key. The Document Box Document Box: menu appears. USB Memory ********************* Press the key to select [USB Memory].
-
Page 167
7 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication. -
Page 168: Status / Job Cancel
Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens — Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job.
-
Page 169
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key to check detailed information of 0009 Detail: the selected job. Status: Processing NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the key to switch the display to other information items. -
Page 170
Status / Job Cancel Item / Key Detail Status Status of job Printing Print Waiting no icon: Pausing print job or error Preferential print job is running Suspended because preferential print job is running Send Job Status screen Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. -
Page 171
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. -
Page 172
Status / Job Cancel Store Job Status screen Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause Press the key to select [Store Job Status]. Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press Store Job Status: a b key to check the store queue. -
Page 173
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. -
Page 174: Checking Job History
Status / Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs. NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer. Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens — Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job. The following job histories are available.
-
Page 175
Status / Job Cancel A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7-2. -
Page 176
Status / Job Cancel Displaying Send Job Log Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause Press the key to select [Send Job Log]. Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press Send Job Log: key to check the send log. -
Page 177
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. -
Page 178
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) 0009 Detail: to check the detailed information of the selected Result: job. Error 10200 Press the key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time… -
Page 179: Sending The Job Log History
Status / Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached. Displaying Job Log History Menu Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main Sys.
-
Page 180
Status / Job Cancel Press the key to select [Job Log History]. Report: Admin Rpt Set. Result Rpt Set. ********************* Job Log History [ Exit Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu Job Log History: appears. Auto Sending ********************* Send History Destination… -
Page 181: Registering Destination
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears. Dest. Confirm.: p Morgan@kyoceramita *********************N NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. [ Exit Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears.
-
Page 182
Status / Job Cancel NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has Register: been changed after you selected the destination from Address Book ********************* the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on 2 *Address Entry page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address. -
Page 183
Status / Job Cancel Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs Jobs: appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time. (1 — 16) ******16*jobs Press the OK key. -
Page 184
Status / Job Cancel In the Job Log History menu, press the Job Log History: to select [Subject]. Send History Destination ********************* Subject [ Exit Press the OK key. Subject appears. Subject: %printer* NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering characters. -
Page 185: Pause And Resumption Of Jobs
Status / Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below. Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause…
-
Page 186: Device/Communication
Status / Job Cancel Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status. Check of Device Status Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Store Job Log Scanner *********************…
-
Page 187
Status / Job Cancel The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed. If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log Log: menu appears. From this screen, you can check or ********************* Outgoing FAX Log print the transmission/reception history. Incoming FAX Log Outgoing FAX Rpt NOTE: If you are using a user management function,… -
Page 188
Status / Job Cancel 7-22 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 189: Default Setting (System Menu)
8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. • Common Settings …………8-2 • Copy Settings…………..8-56 • Sending Settings…………8-62 • Document Box Settings ……….8-66 • Printer Settings …………8-69 •…
-
Page 190: Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings Common settings include; • How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2 • Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2 • Default Screen …8-5 • Sound …8-6 • Display Bright. …8-7 • Original/Paper Settings …8-8 •…
-
Page 191
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. -
Page 192
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional language Message display Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese If you are using one of the optional languages, it is displayed in place of Portugues. Press the key to select a language. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. -
Page 193
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Item Description Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. -
Page 194: Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting. Item Value Description Off, On * Emit a sound when the Confirmation control panel are pressed.
-
Page 195: Display Bright
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears. Key Confirmation: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu. Display Bright.
-
Page 196
Default Setting (System Menu) Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Dimensions Inch models… -
Page 197
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears. Size Entry(X): (1.97 — 14.02) J **11.23*» Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X). Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 198
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size to be used as the default value. Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value. In the Sys. -
Page 199
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Dimensions Inch models… -
Page 200
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. Custom Orig.Size ********************* Def. Orig. Size Custom PaperSize [ Exit Press the key to select [Custom PaperSize]. -
Page 201
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3). The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Description Paper Size… -
Page 202
Default Setting (System Menu) Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3]) The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears. Cassette 1 Set.: Cassette 1 Size ********************* Cassette 1 Type… -
Page 203
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Description Paper… -
Page 204
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. -
Page 205
Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [Size Entry], you can register a custom Size Entry(Y): size. In the screen that appears, set the vertical size (Y) and horizontal size (X) of the paper using (5.83 — 14.02) the numeric keys. x ***11.49*»… -
Page 206
Default Setting (System Menu) Extra Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Heavy Cardstock × × × × Color × × × × Prepunched × × × × Letterhead × × × ×… -
Page 207
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. Custom Orig.Size ********************* Def. Orig. Size Custom PaperSize [ Exit Press the key to select [Media Type Set.]. Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears. Media type Set.: Plain *********************… -
Page 208
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Print Density menu Print Density: appears. Medium Dark 3 *Normal ********************* Medium Light Press the key to select the print density. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the Plain: screen returns to the menu for the selected paper Paper Weight type. -
Page 209
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed. Name Entry: Enter the name of the custom paper type. Osaka SD Kyocer*S NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- [ Text 5 for details on entering characters. Press the OK key. -
Page 210
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional side feeder installed. Use the procedure below to select the default paper source. In the Sys. -
Page 211
Default Setting (System Menu) Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. -
Page 212
Default Setting (System Menu) Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. -
Page 213
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. -
Page 214: Preset Limit
Default Setting (System Menu) Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys.
-
Page 215
Default Setting (System Menu) Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to change the input units. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************… -
Page 216: Error Handling
Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. Item Description 1-sided…
-
Page 217
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu Error Handling: appears. DuplexPaperError ********************* PaperMismatchErr [ Exit Press the key to select [DuplexPagerError]. Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears. DuplexPaperError: a b 1 *1-sided ********************* Display Error Press the key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled. -
Page 218: Function Defaults
Default Setting (System Menu) Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Orig.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.
-
Page 219
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. Orig.Orientation: a b c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* Press the key to select [c Top Edge Top] or [d Top Edge Left] . Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. -
Page 220
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Continuous Scan]. Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears. Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. -
Page 221
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Original Image]. Press the OK key. Original Image appears. Original Image: 1 *Text+Photo *********************… -
Page 222
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Scan Resolution]. Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears. Scan Resolution: a b 1 *200x100dpi Norm. -
Page 223
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 224
Default Setting (System Menu) File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below. File Format Description Send files in PDF format. TIFF Send files in TIFF format. Send files in XPS format. JPEG Send files in JPEG format. -
Page 225
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. File Format appears. File Format: 1 *PDF ********************* TIFF Press the key to select [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Density Set the default density. -
Page 226
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Density appears. Density: Auto ********************* 2 *Manual Press the key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. -
Page 227
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Zoom appears. Zoom: 1 *100% ********************* Auto Press the key to select [100%] or [Auto]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. -
Page 228
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [File Name Entry]. Press the OK key. -
Page 229
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 230
Default Setting (System Menu) Collate Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Collate Collate not performed. Collate performed. NOTE: Refer to page 3-17 for Collate/Offset. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings. In the Sys. -
Page 231
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description No EcoPrint performed. EcoPrint performed. NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint. -
Page 232
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. EcoPrint: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. -
Page 233
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. 2 in 1 layout ********************* 4 in 1 Layout Border Line [ Exit Press the key to select [2 in 1 Layout]. Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears. 2 in 1 Layout 1 *g L to R f… -
Page 234
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 235
Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description None No border line. l Solid Line Draws solid border lines. m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines. -
Page 236
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Border Line appears. Border Line: None ********************* Solid Line Dotted Line Press the key to select [ None], [l Solid Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. -
Page 237
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Detail Setting]. Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. -
Page 238
Default Setting (System Menu) Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2- sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding p Top Top binding… -
Page 239
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears. Finish.. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* Press the key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p Top]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. -
Page 240
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. 2 in 1 layout ********************* 4 in 1 Layout Border Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Image Quality]. Press the OK key. Image Quality appears. Image Quality: 1 *1 Low(High Comp) *********************… -
Page 241
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Detail Setting]. Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. -
Page 242
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 243: Login Operation
Default Setting (System Menu) Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. Item Description Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters. Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears.
-
Page 244: Copy Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions. • Photo Processing …8-56 • Paper Selection …8-57 • Auto Paper Selection …8-58 • Auto % Priority …8-58 • Select Key Set …8-60 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 245
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Dithering(Normal)] or [Dithering(Rough)]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Auto… -
Page 246: Auto Paper Selection
Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
-
Page 247
Default Setting (System Menu) The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off. Item Detail No zoom performed (copied in original size). Automatic zoom performed as appropriate. Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority. In the Sys. -
Page 248
Default Setting (System Menu) Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. •… -
Page 249
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. Select Key Set.: a b Left ********************* Right [ Exit Press the key to select [Left] or [Right]. Press the OK key. This displays the function Left: selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. -
Page 250: Sending Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. • Select Key Set …8-62 • DestinationCheck …8-64 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 251
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send]. Copy Printer Send ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. The Send menu appears. Send: Select Key Set. -
Page 252
Default Setting (System Menu) DestinationCheck Set whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. The setting items are as follows: Item Description Dest. Confirm. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. Check New Dest. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen for a new destination. -
Page 253
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-65… -
Page 254: Document Box Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box. • Select Key Set …8-66 Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box.
-
Page 255
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box]. Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination Adjust/Maint. [ Exit Press the OK key. The Document Box menu Document Box: appears. -
Page 256
Default Setting (System Menu) IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed. 8-68 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 257: Printer Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Printer Settings Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. • Emulation Set …8-69 • EcoPrint …8-72 • Override A4/LTR …8-73 •…
-
Page 258
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the emulation. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 259
Default Setting (System Menu) When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. In Emulation Set, press the key to select Emulation Set.: [KPDL]. -
Page 260
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Alt. Emulation appears. Alt. Emulation: DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ-850 5 *PCL6 ********************* Press the key to select the printer for alternative emulation. Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears. KPDL Error Rpt: 1 *Off ********************* Press the… -
Page 261
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. EcoPrint: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings. -
Page 262
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears. Override A4/LTR: a b ********************* 2 *On Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode. -
Page 263
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Duplex appears. Duplex: 1 *Off ********************* Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Press the key to select [Off], [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Short Edge]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. -
Page 264
Default Setting (System Menu) Orientation Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape. Portrait Landscape Printer Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer *********************… -
Page 265: Formfeed Timeout
Default Setting (System Menu) FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper.
-
Page 266: Cr Action
Default Setting (System Menu) Item Description Ignore LF No line feed performed. Use the procedure below to specify a LF action. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key.
-
Page 267
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify a CR action. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 268
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 269: Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Default Setting (System Menu) Printing Reports/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges. Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows.
-
Page 270
Default Setting (System Menu) Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine. Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Report]. Report ********************* Counter… -
Page 271: Status Page
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Print. The screen shown is the one when Status Page is Are you sure? selected. z Status Page Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu.
-
Page 272: Network Status
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint.: appears. Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* Send/Box Density Correct. Bk Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Service Setting]. Press the OK key. Service Setting appears. Service Setting: a b Service Status ********************* Network Status…
-
Page 273
Default Setting (System Menu) Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Error Only. Item Description No result report printed. Result report automatically printed. Transmitted images can also be attached. -
Page 274
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Send Result]. The Send Result: Send Result menu appears. E-mail/Folder ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [E-mail/Folder]. E- E-mail/Folder: mail/Folder appears. 3 *Error Only ********************* Press the key to select [Off], [On] or [Error Only]. -
Page 275: Adjustment/Maintenance
Default Setting (System Menu) Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. • Copy Denst. Adj. …8-87 • Send/Box Density …8-88 • Correct. Bk Line …8-89 • New Developer…8-90 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 276
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. This displays the density Manual: selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is selected. 0 Normal ********************* Press the key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. -
Page 277
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used. -
Page 278
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint.: appears. Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* Send/Box Density Correct. Bk Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Correct. Bk Line]. Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears. Correct. -
Page 279
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [New Developer]. Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. New Developer. Are you sure? Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/ Maint. -
Page 280: Date/Timer
Default Setting (System Menu) Date/Timer Date/Timer settings include: • Date/Time …8-92 • Date Format …8-95 • Time Zone …8-97 • Summer Time …8-99 • Auto Error Clear …8-101 • Auto Sleep …8-103 • Auto Panel Reset …8-106 • Low Power Timer …8-108 •…
-
Page 281
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login The Date Settings menu appears. -
Page 282
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-151) is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time, press [Yes](the Left Select key). -
Page 283
Default Setting (System Menu) Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. -
Page 284
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. 8-96 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 285
Default Setting (System Menu) Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time difference. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************… -
Page 286
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear. 8-98 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 287: Summer Time
Default Setting (System Menu) Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. Use the procedure below to set Summer Time. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************…
-
Page 288
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. 8-100 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 289: Auto Error Clear
Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared.
-
Page 290
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login… -
Page 291: Auto Sleep
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
-
Page 292
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary. Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings… -
Page 293
Default Setting (System Menu) Sleep Timer If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 15 minutes. In the Sys. -
Page 294: Auto Panel Reset
Default Setting (System Menu) in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings.
-
Page 295
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Auto Panel Reset]. Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears. Auto Panel Reset: a b 2 *On ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. -
Page 296: Low Power Timer
Default Setting (System Menu) The Timer Settings menu appears. Timer Setting: Err. Clear Timer ********************* Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer [ Exit Press the key to select [Panel Reset Timer]. Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears. PanelReset Timer:D b (5 — 495) ******90*sec.
-
Page 297: Unusable Time
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login…
-
Page 298
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. -
Page 299
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. End Time appears. End Time: Hour Min. ***07*: (Current Time 11:45) Press the key or numeric keys to set the End Time. Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears. Unlock Code: (0000 — 0000) ********99*** Press the key or numeric keys to set the… -
Page 300: Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)
Default Setting (System Menu) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional). Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered.
-
Page 301
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Add Address]. Press the OK key. Add Address appears. Add Address: Contact ********************* Group Press the key to select [Contact]. Press the OK key. This displays the screen for Detail: editing destinations. Contact Name Sally NOTE:… -
Page 302
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering E-mail Address Press the key to display E-mail Address. Detail: p E-mail Address: 4/7 t_maury@kyoceramita.N [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry Address Entry: screen appears. [ Text Enter the e-mail address. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. -
Page 303
Default Setting (System Menu) Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item Description Max. No. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E.g. -
Page 304
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Path appears. Path: SD3\report* [ Text Enter the path name. Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. Login User Name: A b Maury* [ Text Enter the login user name. Press the OK key. Login Password appears. Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO* [ Text… -
Page 305
Default Setting (System Menu) Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a Dest. Confirm.: connection with the entered destination. p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000********* b 0667741234 [ Exit If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). -
Page 306: Adding A Group
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 307
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Add Address appears. Add Address: Contact 2 *Group ********************* Press the key to select [Group]. Press the OK key. This displays the screen for Detail: editing groups. Group Name: GUI Section NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already been registered, the screen will display Registered [ Edit… -
Page 308
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering Group Member Press the key to display Group Member. Detail: Group Member: [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays Group Member: the list of destinations registered to the group. p Sally ********************* b Morgan G Morgan [ Menu… -
Page 309
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group, the screen will display This address is already registered. and return to the screen of step 7. Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below. -
Page 310: Print List
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to display Address Number. Detail: Address Number: [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry Address Number: screen appears. (001 — 120) *****053* Press the key or the numeric keys to enter the address number.
-
Page 311
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: appears. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu Press the key to select the destination you want to edit. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu Menu: appears. -
Page 312
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them. The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below: No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15 No.5… -
Page 313
Default Setting (System Menu) Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key. Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key. In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where Select Key No.: you want to edit the destination and hold it (2 No. -
Page 314
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Overwrite. Are you sure? z No. 1 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key, overwriting the previous one. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. -
Page 315: Restarting The System
Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the System Restart the printer without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system. In the Sys.
-
Page 316: Network Setup
Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setup The following network settings are available. • LAN Interface Setup …8-128 • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-129 • TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-129 • NetWare Setup …8-130 • AppleTalk Setup …8-132 • Protocol Detail …8-135 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
-
Page 317
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears. LAN Interface: 1 *Auto ********************* 10Base-Half 10Base-Full Press the key to select the desired LAN interface. The available LAN interfaces are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. -
Page 318
Default Setting (System Menu) The System menu appears. System: Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk… -
Page 319
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). -
Page 320
Default Setting (System Menu) Ether-II 802.2 SNAP Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-127. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. -
Page 321
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [WSD-SCAN]. Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu appears. WSD-SCAN: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off]. -
Page 322
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [WSD-PRINT]. Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu WSD-PRINT: appears. -
Page 323
Default Setting (System Menu) Protocol Detail Make other network related settings. Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* NetBEUI Selects whether or not to × receive documents using NetBEUI. Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol. -
Page 324
Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* Select whether or not to use IPP, and the number of the Port number: 631 port to be used. IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-138. -
Page 325
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Protocol Detail ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [Protocol Detail]. Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu Protocol Detail: a b appears. -
Page 326: Network Security
Default Setting (System Menu) Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. The following network security settings are available. • SSL Setting …8-138 • SNMPv3 Setting …8-143 • IPSec Setting …8-144 SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL network security for communication.
-
Page 327
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. Secure Protocol ********************* Host Name LAN Interface [ Exit Press the key to select [Secure Protocol]. Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. Secure Protocol: a b ********************* IPP Security… -
Page 328: Http Security
Default Setting (System Menu) The System menu appears. System: Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. Secure Protocol ********************* Host Name LAN Interface…
-
Page 329
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). -
Page 330
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or [HTTPS only]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. LDAP Security Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. -
Page 331
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. Secure Protocol: a b IPP Security HTTP Security LDAP Security ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [LDAP Security]. Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears. LDAP Security: 1 *Off ********************* LDAPv3/TLS… -
Page 332
Default Setting (System Menu) IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 333
Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule Rule Setting: Setting appears. Press the key to select 1 *Off ********************* [On] or [Off]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-145… -
Page 334: Interface Block Setting
Default Setting (System Menu) Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. The following interface block settings are available: • USB Host (USB memory slot setting) •…
-
Page 335: Security Level
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. USB Host appears. USB Host: 1 *Unblock ********************* Block Press the key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu. USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device).
-
Page 336
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. USB Device appears. USB Device: 1 *Unblock ********************* Block Press the key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu. 8-148 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 337
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 338: Security Level (Security Level Setting)
Default Setting (System Menu) Security Level (Security Level setting) The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu. 8-150 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 339: Optional Functions
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Op Functions Although nothing is currently displayed, when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed, the licenses can be set using this menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-151…
-
Page 340
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-152 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 341: Maintenance
9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement. • Cleaning…………….9-2 • Toner Container …………9-5 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 342: Cleaning
Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality. CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
-
Page 343
Maintenance Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands. NOTE: The drum unit is sensitive to light. Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes. -
Page 344
Maintenance On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner (green) back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire, then return it to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION ). IMPORTANT: Remove the fixing tape on the main charger cleaner before cleaning for the first time. -
Page 345: Toner Container
Maintenance Toner Container When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner. Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality. CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
-
Page 346
Maintenance Remove the label from the toner container. Install the new toner container in the machine. Push firmly on the top of the container at the positions marked PUSH, until you hear a click. Turn the lock lever to the lock position. Close the front cover. -
Page 347
Maintenance Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet. We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time. -
Page 348
Maintenance OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 349: 10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine. • Solving Malfunctions ………..10-2 • Responding to Error Messages ……..10-5 • Clearing Paper Jams ……….10-11 OPERATION GUIDE 10-1…
-
Page 350: Solving Malfunctions
Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions…
-
Page 351
Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Copies have a moire Is the original a printed Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-12 pattern (dots grouped photograph? together in patterns and not aligned uniformly). Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. -
Page 352
PC set application software settings are properly? set properly. While the operation Is the operation panel Check the panel lock setting in KYOCERA panel was being used, locked? COMMAND CENTER and change COMMAND the keys locked up the setting if necessary. -
Page 353: Responding To Error Messages
Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. Alphanumeric Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Load paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper. 2-29 of paper? Load paper in MP Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose…
-
Page 354
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Incorrect Login User – Enter correct login user name or — Name or Password. password. Job Is canceled. Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing The printing count exceeded the — restriction exceeded. count restricted by Job acceptable count restricted by Job Job is canceled. -
Page 355
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Scanner memory – Scanning cannot be performed due — is full. to insufficient memory of scanner. Job is canceled. The job is canceled. Press the OK key. Is the acceptable scanning Press the OK key to print, send or —… -
Page 356
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Send error. – 1105: E-mail — The SMTP protocol #### setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMTP protocol setting. Scan to PC (SMB) — SMB setting is turned off. -
Page 357
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page The phone receiver is – Put down the receiver. — off the hook. Hang Up. File is not found. – The specified file is not found. The — Job is canceled. job is canceled. Press the OK key. Top tray is full of –… -
Page 358
Troubleshooting Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes If an error lamp flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1.5 seconds, check the following. -
Page 359: Clearing Paper Jams
Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below. Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs, the error message displays the location of the jam.
-
Page 360
Troubleshooting Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray. Reload the MP tray. Open and close the top cover to clear the error and the machine warms up and resumes printing. Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in paper cassette or paper feeder. Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder. -
Page 361
Troubleshooting Open the duplexer’s cover in front of the machine and remove any jammed paper. Open the duplexer’s cover at the rear of the machine and remove any jammed paper. Push the cassette back in securely, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing. -
Page 362: Inside The Machine
Troubleshooting Inside the Machine Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine. Remove any partially fed paper. Open the front cover, and lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands.
-
Page 363: Rear Cover
Troubleshooting If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it along the normal running direction of the paper. Return the drum unit to its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine. Insert the developer unit together with the toner container, back into the machine.
-
Page 364: Optional Document Processor
Troubleshooting If the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit, open the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it out. Close the rear cover, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing.
-
Page 365
Troubleshooting Open the document processor. Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine. Close the document processor. Place the originals. OPERATION GUIDE 10-17… -
Page 366
Troubleshooting 10-18 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 367: 11 Management
11 Management This chapter explains the following operations. • User Login Administration……….. 11-2 • Job Accounting …………11-13 • Checking the Counter ……….11-37 OPERATION GUIDE 11-1…
-
Page 368: User Login Administration
Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in. Access are in three levels — User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.
-
Page 369
Management Use the procedure below to enable user login administration. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. -
Page 370
Management Press the OK key. User Login appears. User Login: 1 *Off Local Authentic. ********************* Netwk Authentic. Press the key to select [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. If you select [Netwk Authentic.], enter the host Host Name: name and domain name of the authentication… -
Page 371
Management Login/Logout Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Login Log in using the procedure below. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. If the screen below appears during the operations, Login User Name perform the following login operations. -
Page 372
Management Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default login user name). The table below explains the user information to be registered. Item Description User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). -
Page 373
Management In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [User/Job Account], and then press User/Job Account ********************* the OK key. User Property Common Settings [ Exit If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. -
Page 374
Management Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter User Name: the login user name in the next screen, and then press the OK key. [ Text Press the key to select [Exit] and then l User01: press the OK key. Exit ********************* Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see… -
Page 375: Changing User Properties
Management Press the key to select [Account Name:], press Detail: [Change] (the Right Select key), select the account, and then press the OK key. Account Name: k KyoceramitaOsaka NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and [ Change ] the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is not displayed.
-
Page 376
Management In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set.]. User Login Set. ********************* Job Account. Set. Unknown ID Job [ Exit Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu User Login Set.: a b appears. -
Page 377: Add User
Management The overwrite confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List. Deleting a user Press the key to select the user you want Local User List: a b to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select l DeviceAdmin key).
-
Page 378
Management Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 379: Job Accounting
Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. • Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts. • Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security. •…
-
Page 380: Unknown Id Job
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password.
-
Page 381
Management Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. In the screen below, enter the account ID using the Account ID: numeric keys and press the OK key. -
Page 382: Managing Accounts
Management Managing Accounts This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required. Item Description Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
-
Page 383: Default Setting
Management Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu Job Account.Set.:a b appears. Each Job Account Account. List ********************* Default Setting [ Exit Press the key to select [Account. List]. Press the OK key. Account. List appears. Account. List: k UI R&D DEP.
-
Page 384
Management Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to manage accounts. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. -
Page 385
Management Press the OK key. Account. List appears. Account. List: k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing account information Press the key to select the account whose information you want to change, and then press the Account. -
Page 386
Management Deleting an account Press the key to select the account you Account. List: want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right k UI R&D DEP. Select key). k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu Press the key to select [Delete]. -
Page 387: Apply Limit
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password.
-
Page 388: Restricting The Use Of The Machine
Management Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-20.
-
Page 389
Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item Description No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Reject Usage Restriction is applied. Use the procedure below to select a restriction method. Follow steps 1 to 7 of Managing Accounts on page 11-16. -
Page 390
Management If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit Limit Pages: number of pages in the next screen, and then press (1 — 9999999) the OK key. **123456*pages Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary. Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen Overwrite. -
Page 391
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. -
Page 392
Management Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. 11-26 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 393
(Other) used for scanning (excludes copying). FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only) [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. -
Page 394
Management Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [User/Job Account], and then press User/Job Account ********************* the OK key. -
Page 395
Management Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu Default Setting: a b appears. Apply Limit ********************* Copy/Print Count Counter Limit [ Exit Press the key to select [Counter Limit]. Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears. Counter Limit: Copy Restriction ********************* Print Restrict. -
Page 396: Counting The Number Of Pages Printed
FAX TX Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
-
Page 397
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 398
Management To reset the counter, press the key to select Total Accounting:a b [Counter Reset]. Printed Pages Scanned Pages ********************* Counter Reset [ Exit Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Reset counter. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). -
Page 399
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 400
Management If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Copy/Print Pages:C b key to switch the counted items. Copy: If the number of output sheets is restricted by an 1234567 account management function, the upper limit on Limit:1234567 the number of output sheets is also displayed. After confirming the content, press the OK key. -
Page 401: Printing An Accounting Report
Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
-
Page 402
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 403: Checking The Counter
You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the total number of pages used. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys.
-
Page 404
Management Press the key to check the count. Printed Pages: Copy: 1234567 After completing checking the count, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account. 11-38 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 405: Appendix
Appendix • Optional Equipment ………Appendix-2 • Character Entry Method……..Appendix-5 • Paper ……………Appendix-9 • Specifications ……….Appendix-18 • Glossary…………Appendix-23 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-1…
-
Page 406: Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine. Document Processor Expansion Memory Paper Feeder Document Processor (DP-110) Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying. For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-45.
-
Page 407
NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory Precautions for Handling the Memory Module Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. -
Page 408
Remove the memory module from its package. Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket, carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place. Then, push down the memory module to secure. -
Page 409: Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters. Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters. 1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s). 2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.
-
Page 410: Selecting Type Of Characters
Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters, the following three types are available: To enter alphabets. To enter numerals. Symbols To enter symbols. In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right File name input: Select key) to select the type of characters you want to enter.
-
Page 411: Entering Characters
Entering Characters After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters. Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed. Entry mode Available characters Alphabetic/Symbol .
-
Page 412
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it. If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there, spaces are automatically entered in between. -
Page 413: Paper
Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. Cassette Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, 250 (80g/m Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1 B6, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K,…
-
Page 414
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50″ or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02″… -
Page 415: Basic Paper Specifications
Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular (‘dry’) copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
-
Page 416: Choosing The Appropriate Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine.
-
Page 417
Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. -
Page 418: Special Paper
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
-
Page 419
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper. Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. -
Page 420
Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. -
Page 421
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output. Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Item Specifications Top sheet weight… -
Page 422: Specifications
Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. Machine Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, single drum system Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal) Original Feed System Fixed…
-
Page 423
Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Paper Front 250 sheets (80 g/m Capacity Cassette Multi Purpose 50 sheets (80 g/m , plain paper, A4/Letter or less) Tray Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments) -
Page 424
Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Power During printing 479.9 W (U.S.A./Canada), 470 W 498 W (U.S.A./Canada), 484 W Consump- (European countries) (European countries) tion During standby 83.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 83.4 W 91.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W (European countries) (European countries) Low power 82.6 W (U.S.A./Canada), 82.3 W… -
Page 425
Scanner Item Description Operating System Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 System requirements IBM PC/AT compatible CPU: Celeron 600Mhz or higher RAM: 128MB or more HDD free space: 20MB or more Interface: Ethernet Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi… -
Page 426: Environmental Specifications
(W) × (D) × (H) Weight 3 kg or less Environmental Specifications Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Time to Low Power mode (default 2 minutes setting) Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 15 minutes Recovery time from Low Power mode 10 seconds or less…
-
Page 427: Glossary
Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer’s Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data.
-
Page 428
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption. KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language) Kyocera’s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. Multi Purpose (MP) Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels. -
Page 429
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet. PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly- functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. -
Page 430
TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission. -
Page 431: Index
Index 2-in-1 Mode 4-11 4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Page Boundary Lines 4-13 COMMAND CENTER 2-25 Connecting LAN Cable 2-5 Numerics Power Cable 2-7 USB Cable 2-7 1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-7 Connection Method 2-3 Continuous Scan Copy 4-15 Send 5-16 Accessibility Appendix-23 Copy Adjusting Density 5-13 Adjusting Density 3-10 Auto 3-10…
-
Page 432
File Format 8-36 Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-18 File Name 8-39 Entry Original Image 8-32 Body 5-18 Original Orientation 8-30 File Name 4-18, 5-17 Scan Resolution 8-33 Subject 5-18 Zoom 8-38 Error Handling 8-28 Default Gateway Appendix-23 Error Messages 10-5 Default Screen 8-5 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Density Adjustment… -
Page 433
Raw Port 8-135 SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-135 KPDL Appendix-24 SNMP 8-135 TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-129 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-129, 8-132, 8-133 Label Appendix-16 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Operation Panel 1-2 Login 3-6, 11-5 Option Logout 3-6, 11-5 Document Processor Appendix-2 Low Power Mode 3-5 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Low Power Timer 8-108 Overview Appendix-2… -
Page 434
Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-14 Status Page 8-81 Specifications Appendix-11 Transmission Result Reports 8-85 Weight 8-17 Product Library 2-2 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Paper Jam 10-11 Cassette 1 10-12 Quick Setup Screen Cassette 2 10-12 Changing Registration 8-60, 8-62, 8-66 Document Processor 10-16 Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-15 Jam Location Indicators 10-11 Multi Purpose Tray 10-15… -
Page 435
Printer 8-69 Printing Documents 6-2 Send 8-62 Removing 6-6 Sleep 3-5 Saving Documents 6-4 Slit Glass User Login Administration 11-2 Cleaning 9-2 Adding 11-6 SMTP Appendix-25 Changing Properties 11-9 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Enabling/Disabling 11-2 Specifications Login 11-5 Document Processor Appendix-22 Logout 11-5 Environmental Specifications Appen- Unknown login user name Job 11-11… -
Page 436
Index-6 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 439
First Edition 2009.7…
Как использовать наш сайт инструкций OnlineManuals.ru
Наша цель состоит в том, чтобы предоставить вам быстрый доступ к содержанию инструкции для Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP.
С помощью онлайн просмотра, Вы можете быстро просмотреть содержимое инструкции и найти решение проблемы с Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP.
Для Вашего удобства
Если листать руководство пользователя Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP прямо на сайте, не очень удобно для Вас, есть два возможных решения:
• Просмотр в полноэкранном режиме — легко просмотреть руководство пользователя (без загрузки его на свой компьютер), Вы можете использовать режим полноэкранного просмотра.
Для просмотра инструкции пользователя Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP на полном экране, используйте кнопку «Открыть в Pdf-viewer».
• Загрузка на компьютер — Вы можете также скачать Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP на свой компьютер и сохранить его в файлах.
Многие люди предпочитают читать документы не на экране, а в печатной версии.
Возможность печати руководства пользователя также была предусмотрена на нашем сайте,
и вы можете использовать ее, нажав на иконку «печать» в Pdf-viewer.
Нет необходимости печатать все руководство Руководство пользователя, руководство по эксплуатации МФУ (многофункционального устройства) Kyocera FS-1128MFP, можно выбрать только нужные страницы инструкции.
-
Страница 1
OPERATION GUIDE F S — 11 0 0 F S — 13 0 0 D 870CKGB20008 *870CKGB20008* FS- 1 028MFP/FS- 1 1 28MFP[…]
-
Страница 2
Introduction Thank you fo r your purchase of FS-1028MFP/FS-112 8MFP. This Operation Guid e is intended to he lp you operate the machine corre ctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple trou bleshooting action as necessary, so th at you can alwa ys use the machin e in good condition. Please read this Operation Guide befo re you start using […]
-
Страница 3
OPERATION GUIDE i Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and pa rts of the machine ma rked with symbo ls are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals an d surrounding objects, an d ensure co rrect and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below. Symbols The U symbol indicat […]
-
Страница 4
Contents ii OPERATION GUIDE Content s Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Precautions for Use. . . . . . […]
-
Страница 5
Contents OPERATION GUIDE iii Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . […]
-
Страница 6
Contents iv OPERATION GUIDE 9 Maintena nce Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 T oner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 10 T roubleshooti[…]
-
Страница 7
OPERATION GUIDE v Caution / W arning Labels Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the mach ine at the following locations fo r safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoi d fire or electric shock when removing a p aper jam or when replacing toner . High temperature insid e. Do not touch parts in this ar ea, because there is a danger o[…]
-
Страница 8
vi OPERATION GUIDE Inst allation Precautions Environment CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which ar e unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fa ll over. This type of situation presents a da nger of perso nal injury or da mage to the machine. Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust[…]
-
Страница 9
OPERATION GUIDE vii • Avoid loca tions with direct exposure to hot or co ld air . • Avoid poorly ve ntilated locations. If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after in stallation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozo ne is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s heal[…]
-
Страница 10
viii OPERATION GUIDE Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a dan ger of fire or electrical sh ock should they fall inside. Do not remove any of the covers from the ma chine as t[…]
-
Страница 11
OPERATION GUIDE ix CAUTION Do not pull the power cord when removin g it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become brok en and the re is a dange r of fire or e lectrical shock . (Always gras p the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.) Always remove the power plug fr om the outlet when moving the machine .[…]
-
Страница 12
x OPERATION GUIDE Cautions when handling consumables CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep the tone r containe r and the was te toner box out of the reach of childr en. If toner happens to spill from the to ner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and in[…]
-
Страница 13
OPERATION GUIDE xi Other precautions Return the exhau sted toner cont ainer and waste tone r box to your dealer or servic e representative . The collected toner container and waste to ner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations . Store the machine while avoi ding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in[…]
-
Страница 14
xii OPERATION GUIDE Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be h azardous to the human body. Fo r this reason , laser radiation emitted insid e this machine is her metically seale d within the pr otective housin g and exter nal cover. I n the normal op eration of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is class[…]
-
Страница 15
OPERATION GUIDE xiii Safety Instructions Regarding the Di sconnection of Power (Europe) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation de vice! Othe r switches on the equipme nt are only functional switches and are not suitable for isola t ing the equipment from the power source. VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung ! Die ander […]
-
Страница 16
xiv OPERATION GUIDE SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certif ied by the manufactur er to Class 1 level under the radiat ion performance standards establish ed by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the pro duct is safe to use during normal oper ation and maintena[…]
-
Страница 17
OPERATION GUIDE xv 3. Optical unit When checking the optical u nit, avoid di rect exposure to the laser beam, which is invi sible. Shown at below is the label located on the cove r of the optical unit. 4. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenanc e in structions in the other sectio n of this manual.[…]
-
Страница 18
xvi OPERATION GUIDE Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation de vice! Othe r switches on the equipme nt are only functional switches and are not suitable for isola t ing the equipment from the power source. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le se ul moyen de mett[…]
-
Страница 19
OPERATION GUIDE xvii W arran ty (USA) FS-1028MFP/FS-1 128MFP MUL TIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED W ARRANTY Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada , Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) war rant the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (ref erred to as “MFP”), and th e new accessorie s installed with the initial in stallation of[…]
-
Страница 20
xviii OPERATION GUIDE Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning • It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted mate rial without permission of the copyright owner . • Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be pen alized by low . It may not be limited to th ese items. D o not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copi[…]
-
Страница 21
OPERATION GUIDE xix Legal and Safety Information Please read this information bef ore using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. • Legal Information ……. ………………………. ………….. ………. xx • Regarding T rade Names …………… ……….. ………… ……… xxi • Energy Savi[…]
-
Страница 22
xx OPERATION GUIDE Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part o f this guide without the prior written consent of Kyo cera Mita Corporation is prohibited.[…]
-
Страница 23
OPERATION GUIDE xxi Regarding T rade Names • PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are tradema rks of Kyocer a Corporation. • KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corpor ation. • Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and In ternet Explorer are registere d trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the U.S.A. a nd/or other countries. • Windows Me, Windows XP and Win[…]
-
Страница 24
xxii OPERATION GUIDE GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied code s (www.fsf.org/copyl eft/gpl.html). Please access “http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more informati on on how to make GPL applied code s available. Open SSLeay License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All right s reserved. Redistribution and us[…]
-
Страница 25
OPERATION GUIDE xxiii Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-19 98 Eric Y oung (eay@crypt soft.c om) All right s reserved. This package is an SSL imple mentation writ ten by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as th[…]
-
Страница 26
xxiv OPERATION GUIDE Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 Sof tware shall mean the digita lly encoded, machine readable, scalab le outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. 2 Y ou agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use th e Softwa re to reprodu ce and display weight s, styles and versions of letters, numerals[…]
-
Страница 27
OPERATION GUIDE xxv Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where ener gy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power co nsumption is still reduced to a minimum when the[…]
-
Страница 28
xxvi OPERATION GUIDE About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contai ns the following chapters. Chapter 1 — Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation pa nel keys. Chapter 2 — Prepara tion before Use Explains adding paper, placi ng original s, connecting the machine, and necessa ry configurations before first use. Chapter 3 — Basic Op[…]
-
Страница 29
OPERATION GUIDE xxvii Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used dependin g on the nature of the description. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the opera tion pane l keys or a comput er screen. Press the Start key . [Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Message Display . Select [System]. Italic Indicates a messag[…]
-
Страница 30
xxviii OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 31
OPERATION GUIDE 1-1 1P a r t N a m e s This chapter identifies the ma chine parts and operation panel keys. • Operation Panel ……… …………………………………… ……… 1-2 • Machine ………….. …………………………… ……………. ……… 1-4[…]
-
Страница 32
Part Names 1-2 OPERATION GUIDE Operation Panel Blinks while data is transmitted. Message Display . Check what is shown here while operating t he machine. Blinks during printing operation. Selects the menu displayed at the lower left in the Message Display . Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display . Switches between on-h[…]
-
Страница 33
Part Names OPERATION GUIDE 1-3 1 Lit when the machine’s main power is on. Used to register or recall programs. Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen. T urns the machine on/off. Also used to put it into or recover it from sleep mode. Cancels the printing job in progress. Resets settings and displays the basic screen. S tart s c[…]
-
Страница 34
Part Names 1-4 OPERATION GUIDE Machine 1 Original Cover (For FS-1028MFP only) 2 Platen 3 Original Size Indicator Plate 4 Operation Panel 5 T op Cover 6 Front Cover 7 Drum Unit 8 Main Charger Cleaner 9 Lock Lever 10 T oner Container 7 2 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 10[…]
-
Страница 35
Part Names OPERATION GUIDE 1-5 1 11 T op T ray 12 Paper Length Guid e 13 Paper S topper 14 Paper Wid th Guides 15 Cassette 16 Paper Width Guides (MP T ray) 17 MP (Multi- Purpose) Tray 18 MP T ray Extension 11 12 13 15 14 16 17 18 16[…]
-
Страница 36
Part Names 1-6 OPERATION GUIDE 19 Anchor Pin 20 USB Interface Connector 21 Network Interface Connect or 22 Rear Cover 23 Main Power Switch 24 Power Cord Connector 21 20 19 24 23 22[…]
-
Страница 37
OPERATION GUIDE 2-1 2 Prep aration before Use This chapter explains t he preparations before usi ng this equipment for t he first time as well as the procedures for l oading papers and originals. • Check bund led items …………… …………………………… ……… 2-2 • Determining the Connection Meth od and Prep aring Ca bles …[…]
-
Страница 38
Preparation befo re Use 2-2 OPERATION GUIDE Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled. • Printed material • CD-ROM(Prod uct Library) • CD-ROM(TW AIN compat ible application) Document s Cont ained in the Included CD-ROM The following do cuments are contained in the included CD -ROM (Product Lib rary). Refer to them a[…]
-
Страница 39
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-3 2 Determining the Connection Method and Prep aring Cables Check the method to connect the equip ment to a PC or network, and prepare th e necessary cables. Connection Example Determine the method to conn ect the equipment to a PC or network by refer ring to the illustration below. Connecting a scanner to y[…]
-
Страница 40
Preparation befo re Use 2-4 OPERATION GUIDE Prep aring Necessary Cables The following in terfaces ar e available to connect th e equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the inter face you use. A vailable St andard Interfaces Function Interface Necessary Cable Printer/Scanner /Network F AX* * Network F AX and F AX functions a va[…]
-
Страница 41
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-5 2 Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to conn ect cables to the machine. 1 Turn the main power switch off (O). 2 Connect the machine to the PC or your networ k device. When using the netw ork interface, remove the cap.. 3 Connect one end of the supp lied power cable to the machine and the oth er end t[…]
-
Страница 42
Preparation befo re Use 2-6 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Turn the main power swit ch on (|). The machine begins to warm up. 5 When connecting the network cable, configu re the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on p age 2-12 .[…]
-
Страница 43
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-7 2 Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display. Use the procedure below to select th e language. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will a[…]
-
Страница 44
Preparation befo re Use 2-8 OPERATION GUIDE Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the Common Se ttings menu.[…]
-
Страница 45
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-9 2 Setting Date and T ime Follow the steps below to set the loc al date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the tr ansmission func tion, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date , time and time difference from GMT of the[…]
-
Страница 46
Preparation befo re Use 2-10 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. 6 A login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. 7 Press the OK key . The Date Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone]. 9 Press the OK key . T ime Zone appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select your[…]
-
Страница 47
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-11 2 Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the Date Sett ing menu. 14 Press the U or V key to select [Date/ T ime]. 15 Press the OK key . Date/T ime appears. 16 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position, press the U or V key to enter year , month and day , and then press the OK key . 17 P[…]
-
Страница 48
Preparation befo re Use 2-12 OPERATION GUIDE Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compati ble with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/ SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and A ppleTalk. It en ables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other pla tforms. This[…]
-
Страница 49
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-13 2 IMPORTANT: To make the settin gs, you must have logged in us ing a user ID with administrator privileges. The default settings of the login user name and login password are both 2800 . If you have logged in usin g a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator o nly. a[…]
-
Страница 50
Preparation befo re Use 2-14 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. 10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting]. 11 Press the OK key . The IPv4 Setting menu appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP]. 13 Press the OK k[…]
-
Страница 51
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-15 2 17 Press the U or V key to select [O ff] and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the IPv4 Setting menu. 18 Press the U or V key to select [IP Address]. 19 Press the OK key . IP Address appears. 20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address. Press the Y or Z key to […]
-
Страница 52
Preparation befo re Use 2-16 OPERATION GUIDE 23 Press the OK key . Subnet Mask appears. 24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Ma sk. Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position horizontally . Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digit s can be set betwee n 000 and 255. IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting ([…]
-
Страница 53
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-17 2 IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting ( page 2-18 ) is [On], the current Defau lt Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Def ault Gateway, s et the DHCP Setting ( page 2-18 ) to Of f. 29 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.[…]
-
Страница 54
Preparation befo re Use 2-18 OPERATION GUIDE DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DH CP server. The default se tting is On . Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear […]
-
Страница 55
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-19 2 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key . The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP /IP]. 8 Press the OK key . TCP/IP appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK k[…]
-
Страница 56
Preparation befo re Use 2-20 OPERATION GUIDE 13 Press the OK key . DHCP appears. 14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off . Use the procedure below to specify […]
-
Страница 57
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-21 2 3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key . The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP /IP]. 8 Press the OK key . TCP/I[…]
-
Страница 58
Preparation befo re Use 2-22 OPERATION GUIDE 11 Press the OK key . The IPv4 Setting menu appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour]. 13 Press the OK key . Bonjour appears. 14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the IPv4 Setting menu. AppleT alk Setup S[…]
-
Страница 59
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-23 2 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and then pres s the OK key . IMPORTANT: To make the settin gs, you must have logged in us ing a user ID with administrator privileges. If you have logged in usin g a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display[…]
-
Страница 60
Preparation befo re Use 2-24 OPERATION GUIDE Inst alling Sof tware Install appropriate software on you r PC from the included Produ ct Library CD-ROM (Pro duct Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA tr ansmission or FAX transmission from your PC. NOTE: Installation on Windo ws XP , Windows 200 0, Ser[…]
-
Страница 61
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-25 2 COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as veri fying the operating status of the machine a nd changing the settings for security, netw ork printing, E-mail transmission and advanced n etworking. NOTE: Here, informa tion on the F AX settings has been omitte d. F[…]
-
Страница 62
Preparation befo re Use 2-26 OPERATION GUIDE Sending E-mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server u sing the SMTP protocol. Before sending images loaded on to this machine as E-mail attachment s, check the following[…]
-
Страница 63
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-27 2 2 Enter the correct settings in each field. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below . 3 Click Submit. Item Descriptio n SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. T o use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SM[…]
-
Страница 64
Preparation befo re Use 2-28 OPERATION GUIDE Loading Paper Paper can be loade d standardly in the ca ssette and the mu lti purpose tray. A paper feede r is also available as an option (refer to Optional Eq uipment on Appen dix-2 ). Before Loading Paper When you open a new pa ckage of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly pr ior to loading[…]
-
Страница 65
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-29 2 Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standar d cassette w ill each hold p lain paper, recycled pape r or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m 2 ). The following paper sizes are suppo rted: Legal, Oficio II , Letter, Executive, Statem ent, A4, B5, A[…]
-
Страница 66
Preparation befo re Use 2-30 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Adjust the position of the p aper width guides located on the lef t and right sides of the casse tte. Press the paper width ad justing tab on the le ft guide and slide the guides to the paper size required. NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the casse tte. 4 Adjust the paper length guid e to the paper siz[…]
-
Страница 67
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-31 2 5 Load the p aper in the cass ette. Ensure the side to be printed is f acing dow n and the paper is n ot folded, curled, or damaged . IMPORTANT: Do not load paper abo ve the triangle mark located on the width guide. • Before loading the pa per , be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is c[…]
-
Страница 68
Preparation befo re Use 2-32 OPERATION GUIDE There is a p aper gauge on the lef t side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply . When paper is exhaus ted, the pointer will go down to the level of (empty). NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, prot ect all paper from h umidity by r emoving it[…]
-
Страница 69
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-33 2 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. 2 Pull out the subtray . 3 Adjust the position of the p aper guides on the MP tray . S tandard p aper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray . For standard pap er sizes, slide the pa per guides to the correspo nding mark.[…]
-
Страница 70
Preparation befo re Use 2-34 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Align the pa per with the p aper guides and insert as far as it will go. IMPORTANT: Keep the side th at was closes t the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be un curled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no pap[…]
-
Страница 71
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-35 2 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. 2 Pull out the subtray . 3 Adjust the position of the p aper guides on the MP tray . S tandard p aper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray . For standard pap er sizes, slide the pa per guides to the correspo nding mark.[…]
-
Страница 72
Preparation befo re Use 2-36 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Align the pa per with the p aper guides and insert as far as it will go. 5 For landscape form envelop es, close the flap. Insert the envel ope all the way along th e width guides, kee ping the print ing side face-u p and the edge with the flap facing tow ards you. For portrait form envelopes, close the[…]
-
Страница 73
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-37 2 IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orie ntation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong directio n or on the wrong face. NOTE: When you load envelo pes in the multi purpose tray , select the en velope type by […]
-
Страница 74
Preparation befo re Use 2-38 OPERATION GUIDE Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for casse tte, for multi purpo se tray and fo r the optional paper feeder (cassette s 2 and 3) is [Letter], and the defa ult media type setting is [Plain]. To fix the t ype of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and me dia t[…]
-
Страница 75
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-39 2 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 3 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 5 Press the OK key . The Orig./Pa per Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1 Set.][…]
-
Страница 76
Preparation befo re Use 2-40 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Press the OK key . Cassette 1 Size appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK ke y . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. 11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 T ype]. 12 Press the OK key . Cassette 1 T ype app[…]
-
Страница 77
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-41 2 Specify ing Paper Size a nd Media T ype for the Multi Purpose T ray To fix the t ype of paper to be used in the multi pu rpose tray, specify the pape r size.When using other than a plain paper, specify th e media type. NOTE: If using the FS-1 128MFP and the mu lti purpose tray is used to print a receive[…]
-
Страница 78
Preparation befo re Use 2-42 OPERATION GUIDE When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 for details on entering char acters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication metho[…]
-
Страница 79
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-43 2 9 Press the OK key . MP T ray Size appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK ke y . If you select [Others], se lect one of th e other options and then press the OK ke y . If you select [Size Entry], use the numer ic keys to enter the Y (vertical) size and pr[…]
-
Страница 80
Preparation befo re Use 2-44 OPERATION GUIDE Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load orig inals for copying, sending or storing. Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordin ary sheet originals. 1 Open the original cover. NOTE: If the optiona l document pr ocessor (DP-1 10) is installe[…]
-
Страница 81
Preparation before Use OPERATION GUIDE 2-45 2 Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor a utomatically scans each sheet of mu ltiple originals. Both sides of two-side d originals are scanned. Part Names of the Documen t Processor (1) T op cover (2) Original width guides (3) Original table (4) Origina l eject table […]
-
Страница 82
Preparation befo re Use 2-46 OPERATION GUIDE How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals. 2 Place the origin als. Put the side to […]
-
Страница 83
OPERATION GUIDE 3-1 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations. • Power On/Of f …………. ………………………. ………….. ……… 3-2 • Auto Low Power Mode …. ………….. ……………………. ……. 3-4 • Sleep and Auto Sleep ….. ………………………. ……….. ……. 3-5 • Logi[…]
-
Страница 84
Basic Operation 3-2 OPERATION GUIDE Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit… Press the Power key. When the main power indica tor is off … T urn the main power switch on. IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not tu rn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the ma[…]
-
Страница 85
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-3 3 Power Off Before turning off the main power switch, pr ess the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power and the memory indicator are off before turnin g off the main power switch. In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time CAUTION: If this machine will be left un use[…]
-
Страница 86
Basic Operation 3-4 OPERATION GUIDE Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches th e machi ne into Low Powe r Mode if left idle for 2 minutes.[…]
-
Страница 87
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-5 3 Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep, pre ss the Power ke y. Message Display and all indicators on the op eration panel will go out to save a maximum amount of powe r except the Main Power indicator. This status is ref erred to a s Sleep. If print dat a is received d uring Sleep, th e print job is performe[…]
-
Страница 88
Basic Operation 3-6 OPERATION GUIDE Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled, it is necessa ry to enter the login user nam e and password to use the machine. NOTE: Y ou will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in with administrator privileges an d change your login user name or lo[…]
-
Страница 89
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-7 3 One-T ouch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys an d program keys on the operation panel are described below. One-T ouch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can ente r the desired de stination by pr essing the applicable one-touch key. For r egistering a destin ation to a one-touch key, ref[…]
-
Страница 90
Basic Operation 3-8 OPERATION GUIDE Message Display The following examples explain the message s and icons used on the message displa y. Reference number Meaning 1 Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the oper ation panel is being used. 2 Displays an icon that indicates the currently sele[…]
-
Страница 91
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-9 3 Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. NOTE: If the Message Display is t urned of f, press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. 2 Place the originals on th e platen or in the optional document processor . NOTE: For loading inst[…]
-
Страница 92
Basic Operation 3-10 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the Star t key to start copying. 6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray . Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjus t the de nsity when copying. NOTE: Y ou may choose Auto mode as the de fault setting (refer to Density on page 8-37 ). The procedure for ad justing the dens ity of copies is exp[…]
-
Страница 93
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-11 3 5 Press the OK key . When [Manual] is se lected, Manual a ppears. Press the U or V key to select yo ur desired de nsity and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Star t key . Copying begins. Selecting Image Quality Select image qu ality suited […]
-
Страница 94
Basic Operation 3-12 OPERATION GUIDE Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to red uce or enlarge the original image. Th e following zoom options are av ailable. Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size. Zoom Entry Manually reduces or enlar ges the original image in 1% increments between 25% […]
-
Страница 95
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-13 3 The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below. 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom]. 3 Press the OK key . Zoom appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired magnification. T o copy in the same size as the original, select [100%]. T o se[…]
-
Страница 96
Basic Operation 3-14 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the OK key . Completed . is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Star t key . Copying begins. Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. The following du plex options are available. You can also cre ate single-sid ed copies from tw o-sided origin als or originals with facing pa[…]
-
Страница 97
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-15 3 T wo-sided to T wo-sided Produces two -sided copies from two-sid ed originals. The optional document processor is required. NOTE: The paper sizes su pported in T wo-sided to T wo-sided are Legal, Letter , Oficio II, Executive, A4, B5, A5 and Folio. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explain ed[…]
-
Страница 98
Basic Operation 3-16 OPERATION GUIDE If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Det ail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the origina l and the original setting orientation. After pressing the OK key , select the binding edge of the original and finished copies, and the original setting orientation . If you select [[…]
-
Страница 99
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-17 3 If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). Copying begins. Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies. You can use the Collate copy function for ta sks such as those shown below. Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required accor[…]
-
Страница 100
Basic Operation 3-18 OPERATION GUIDE Printing — Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. NOTE: T o print the document fr om applicat ions, inst all the printer driver on your com puter from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Libr ary). 1 Create a document u sing an applica tion. 2 Click File and select Print[…]
-
Страница 101
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-19 3 6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. T o print on the special p aper such as thick p aper or transparency , click the Media T ype menu and select the media type. 7 Click Source and select the paper sour ce. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select , papers are supplied automatical[…]
-
Страница 102
Basic Operation 3-20 OPERATION GUIDE Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail messa ge or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessa ry to register the sender and destina tion (recipient ) address on the network. A network environment which enables th e machine to connect to a mail server is[…]
-
Страница 103
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-21 3 Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. NOTE: • Y ou must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server . It is recommended that the ma chine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN. • Access […]
-
Страница 104
Basic Operation 3-22 OPERATION GUIDE 6 If there are addit ional destinations , press the Add Destination key . Repeat step s 2 to 5 to enter additional destina tions. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. 7 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destination s. Press the U or V key to select a destination and press the OK key[…]
-
Страница 105
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-23 3 Send to Folder (SMB )/Send to Folder (FTP) Stores a scanned original image file in t he specified shared folder of any PC. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. NOTE: • Refer to Help of your operating system for det ails on how to share a folde r . • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP[…]
-
Страница 106
Basic Operation 3-24 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Enter the p ath name . Consider, that the share name 7 Press the OK key . Login User Name appears. 8 Enter the login user na me. You have to enter the 9 Press the OK key . Login Password appears. 10 Enter the login p asswor d (account on the destination pc.) 11 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears.[…]
-
Страница 107
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-25 3 For send to folder (SMB) For send to folder (F TP) 12 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). This makes a connection with the entered destinat ion. Item Dat a to be entered Max. characters Host Name (SMB)* Host name or IP addre ss of the PC to receive the data. Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiv ing f[…]
-
Страница 108
Basic Operation 3-26 OPERATION GUIDE If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the sc reen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Pre ss [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check a[…]
-
Страница 109
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-27 3 Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destina tion before transmission ( page 8-64 ) is set to [On], Check thro ugh the all destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key i s presse d. Use the procedure below to op erate the Confirm Destina tion screen. 1 Press the U or V key to[…]
-
Страница 110
Basic Operation 3-28 OPERATION GUIDE S pecifying Destination When specify ing destinat ion, choose from the Addr ess Book or use the One- touch keys. Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination register ed in the Address Book. 1 In the basic screen for sending, press the Address Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appe ars. 2 Press the U or[…]
-
Страница 111
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-29 3 Search in Address Book 1 In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appear s. 2 Press the U or V key to select [ Search(Name )] and then press the OK key . A search screen appears. 3 Enter the characters you want to search. 4 Press the OK key . The a ddress book appear s with the user that st a[…]
-
Страница 112
Basic Operation 3-30 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Enter the characters you want to search. If you press [Menu] (t he Right Select key) and then the OK key , Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. Select the desired item for each and then press th e OK key . 4 Press the OK key . The a ddress book appear s with the user that[…]
-
Страница 113
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-31 3 Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel an y print or send job being executed. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. 1 During a printing or sending job , press the Stop key. The Job Cancel List menu appears. NOTE: Pressing the Sto p key pauses a printing job but does not p a[…]
-
Страница 114
Basic Operation 3-32 OPERATION GUIDE Checking Remaining T oner and Paper You can check the remaining amo unt of toner and that of pape r in each feeder cassette. Checking Remaining T oner 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appear s. 2 Press the U or V key to select [T oner S tatus]. 3 Press the OK key . T oner S tatus appears. The r[…]
-
Страница 115
Basic Operation OPERATION GUIDE 3-33 3 Program (Copying and Sending) Settings of various functions freq uently used for copy ing and sending can be collectivel y registered a s a program. Then, you can change th e current settings of va rious functions to the re gistered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys. Registering Settings[…]
-
Страница 116
Basic Operation 3-34 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 117
OPERATION GUIDE 4-1 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the f unctions available for copying. • Original Size………. …………………………… ………………………………………. 4-2 • Paper Selection………. …………………………… ………………………… ……….. 4-4 • Original Orientation .[…]
-
Страница 118
Copying Fu nctions 4-2 OPERATION GUIDE Original Size Specify the size of originals bein g scanned. Be sure to select the original size befo re starting the copying process. The following o ptions are av ailable. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me nu appears. 4 Press the U or V key[…]
-
Страница 119
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-3 4 If you select [Others], se lect one of th e other options and then press the OK ke y . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for copying. 7 Press the Star t key to start copying. Others: a b ****************** *** 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 1 *ISO B5 q[…]
-
Страница 120
Copying Fu nctions 4-4 OPERATION GUIDE Paper Selection Select the paper source th at co ntains the required paper size. NOTE: S pecify in advance the size and type of the p aper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on p age 8-8 ). Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select th e paper supply cassette. 1 Press the Co[…]
-
Страница 121
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-5 4 Selecting the Multi Purpose T ray Change the paper size and med ia type. The available paper sizes and me dia types are shown in the table belo w. NOTE: Y ou can conveniently select in advance the size and type of pape r that will be used of ten and set them as default (refer to Paper Size and Med ia T ype Se[…]
-
Страница 122
Copying Fu nctions 4-6 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me nu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. 5 Press the OK key . Paper Selection appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.]. 7 Press the OK key . MP T ray Set. appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [S tandard Size], [Others] or [[…]
-
Страница 123
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-7 4 If Add paper in MP tray . is displayed during the copying process, add p aper in the multi purpose tray , and then press the OK key . Copying then resumes.[…]
-
Страница 124
Copying Fu nctions 4-8 OPERATION GUIDE Original Orient ation Select the original orientation to use th e following functions. •D u p l e x • Combine mode When placing originals on the platen When placing originals on th e optional document pro cessor NOTE: T o change the default setting for the or iginal orient ation, refer to Orig.Ori entation[…]
-
Страница 125
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-9 4 Use the procedure below to select th e orientat ion when pl acing the originals on the platen. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me nu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation]. 5 Press the OK key . Orig.Orient ation appears[…]
-
Страница 126
Copying Fu nctions 4-10 OPERATION GUIDE EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use t his functi on for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure fo r making copies us ing EcoPrint is explained below. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key .[…]
-
Страница 127
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-11 4 Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined on to a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each origin al can be indicated. NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, L etter , S t atement and 16K. 2-in-1 Mode Fo[…]
-
Страница 128
Copying Fu nctions 4-12 OPERATION GUIDE 4-in-1 Mode For copying f our original s onto a single sheet. This m o de can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options an d output orientations are a vailable. NOTE: When placing the original on the plate n, be sure to copy the originals in page order . Ori[…]
-
Страница 129
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-13 4 T ypes of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boun dary lines are available. The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Funct ion Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Combin[…]
-
Страница 130
Copying Fu nctions 4-14 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired border line type and then press the OK key . 10 Press the U or V key to select the orientation of the original and then press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for copying. 11 Press the Star t key . Scanning begins. If[…]
-
Страница 131
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-15 4 Continuous Scan When a large number of origina ls cannot be placed in th e document proc essor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches a nd then copied as one jo b. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Ri ght Select key). The procedure for ma king co[…]
-
Страница 132
Copying Fu nctions 4-16 OPERATION GUIDE Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy jo b is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside th e machine for copying to finish. NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail ca n be used. Example o[…]
-
Страница 133
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-17 4 5 Press the OK key . JobFinish Notice appear s. 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key . 7 Press the U or V key to select [A ddress Book] o r [Address Entry], and then pre ss the OK key . 8 If you select [Address Book], selec t [Address Book] on the next scr een and press the OK key […]
-
Страница 134
Copying Fu nctions 4-18 OPERATION GUIDE File Name Entry Names a copy job. Add other information such as date a nd time or job number a s necessary. You can check a job history or job status using th e job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the o[…]
-
Страница 135
Copying Functions OPERATION GUIDE 4-19 4 Print Override This function allows you to suspend the curren t print jo b when yo u need to make copies immedia tely. When the interrupt copy job is comple ted, the machine resume s the suspended print job. NOTE: If the machine is left for 60 seconds in the interruption copy mode, th e interrupt copy job is[…]
-
Страница 136
Copying Fu nctions 4-20 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 137
OPERATION GUIDE 5-1 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. • Original Size…………. ………………………… ………….. ……… 5-2 • Sending Size ………….. ………….. ………………………. ……… 5-4 • Zoom ………….. ………………………. …….[…]
-
Страница 138
Sending Func tions 5-2 OPERATION GUIDE Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending proce ss. Choose the original size from the following groups of or iginal size. Use the procedure below to select th e original size when sending scanne d images[…]
-
Страница 139
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-3 5 If you select [Others], se lect one of th e other options and then press the OK ke y . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for sending. 7 S pecify the destination, and press the St ar t key to start sending. Others: a b ****************** *** 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 1 *IS[…]
-
Страница 140
Sending Func tions 5-4 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). The table below lists the sizes. Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom Original Size ( page 5-2 ), Sending Size , and Zoom ( page 5-6 ) are related to e ach othe r. Refer to the following table. NOTE: When yo u select Sen[…]
-
Страница 141
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-5 5 4 Press the U or V key to select [Sending Size]. 5 Press the OK key . Sending Size ap pears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the de sired sending size. If you select [Others], se lect one of th e other options. 7 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for send[…]
-
Страница 142
Sending Func tions 5-6 OPERATION GUIDE Zoom Scans the original by automatically zo oming it depen ding on the sending size. The table below lists the available options. NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sen ding Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size. When Custom Size or Size E ntry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent[…]
-
Страница 143
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-7 5 Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of origi nal depending on the original. The table below lists the binding di r ections for each original type. Use the procedure below to select th e original type and bindin g direction when sending sca nned originals. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on[…]
-
Страница 144
Sending Func tions 5-8 OPERATION GUIDE Original Orient ation To send the document in the o rientation that can be read properly, spe cify the upper orientation of original. To use the fun ctions below , select the o rientation in w hich the or iginal is set on the platen . • 1-sided / 2-sided Selection When placing the original on the platen When[…]
-
Страница 145
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-9 5 5 Press the OK key . Orig.Orient ation appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [T op E dge T op] or [T op Edge Left]. 7 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for sending. 8 S pecify the destination, and press the St ar t key to start sending. Orig.Orientatio[…]
-
Страница 146
Sending Func tions 5-10 OPERATION GUIDE File Format Select the file format of the image to send. The table below lists the file formats and their details. NOTE: Y ou cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode. Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the original[…]
-
Страница 147
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-11 5 7 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for sending. 8 S pecify the destination, and press the St ar t key to start sending.[…]
-
Страница 148
Sending Func tions 5-12 OPERATION GUIDE Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality op tions. Use the procedure below to select th e quality when sending scanned origin als. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me nu appears. […]
-
Страница 149
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-13 5 Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scannin g the originals. The table below shows the available settings. The procedure for ad justing t he density is explain ed below. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me n[…]
-
Страница 150
Sending Func tions 5-14 OPERATION GUIDE Scan Resolution Select the fineness o f scanning resolution. The finer the scanning be comes (the larger the num ber becomes), the better the image qu ality becomes. However, better resolu tion also re sults in larger f ile size (file capacity) and longer scanning an d sending times. The selectable resolution[…]
-
Страница 151
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-15 5 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows yo u to select the select the color mode used for scanning when send ing images. You can select from Full Color, Gr ayscale or B lack & White. Use the procedure below to select th e color mode when sending scanned image s. 1 Press the Sen[…]
-
Страница 152
Sending Func tions 5-16 OPERATION GUIDE Continuous Scan When the multi-page or iginals cannot be placed in th e document processor at o ne time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches a nd then sent as one job. With this function, o riginals can be scanned one after another u ntil you pr ess [End Scan ] (the Right Select key). The procedu[…]
-
Страница 153
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-17 5 File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scan ned images. You can specify a defa ult for the document nam e. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned docu ments that you are se nding. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu […]
-
Страница 154
Sending Func tions 5-18 OPERATION GUIDE Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail, enter the subje ct and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to en ter the subject and bo dy for an E-mail message and th en send the E-mail. NOTE: Refer to Character Entr y Method o n Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Pr[…]
-
Страница 155
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-19 5 WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this ma chine as files on a WSD-compatible computer . NOTE: For information on operating the computer , refer to the operating system help for your computer . T o use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup ( page 8-1 32 ) must be set to [On] in the network settings. […]
-
Страница 156
Sending Func tions 5-20 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the OK key . WSD Scan appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [From Oper . Panel]. 6 Select the destination computer from th e computer list. Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the information of the selected compute r . 7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and then press the Sta[…]
-
Страница 157
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-21 5 Job Finish Notice This feature send s an e-mail providing notification that tran smission has been com pleted. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on th e platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key . Function Me nu appears. 4 Press the U […]
-
Страница 158
Sending Func tions 5-22 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the basic screen for sending. 10 S pecify the destination, and press the St ar t key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-m ail address.[…]
-
Страница 159
Sending Func tions OPERATION GUIDE 5-23 5 FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt do cuments when you send them. If you select [O n] in this optio n, you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. Use the procedure below to sca n and send originals as encrypte d files. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the origina ls in the doc[…]
-
Страница 160
Sending Func tions 5-24 OPERATION GUIDE Sanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the mach ine us ing the USB cable and installt he Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. Fo r details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide . Th[…]
-
Страница 161
OPERATION GUIDE 6-1 6D o c u m e n t B o x This chapter explains the typical procedure fo r utilizing Document Box. • Printing Documents S tored in USB Memory …… ……….. 6-2 • Saving Documents to USB Me mory (Scan to USB) ….. 6-4 • Removing USB Memory …………… ……………………. ……. 6-6[…]
-
Страница 162
Document Box 6-2 OPERATION GUIDE Printing Document s S tored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory withou t having to use a comp uter. Limit ations • The following file types can be printed: • PDF file (V ersion 1.5) • TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 form[…]
-
Страница 163
Document Box OPERATION GUIDE 6-3 6 Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder . Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the ro ot directory can be viewed. 6 Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file name is indicated by a chec kmark next to it. When you want to print additional files, repeat steps 5 t[…]
-
Страница 164
Document Box 6-4 OPERATION GUIDE Saving Document s to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows yo u to store scanned ima ge files in USB memor y connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format. NOTE: The ma ximum numbe r of the stor able files is 100 . Storing Document s The procedure for sto ring documents in re[…]
-
Страница 165
Document Box OPERATION GUIDE 6-5 6 IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memor y, ensure that you use the correct rem oval procedure, as described in Removing USB Memo ry on page 6-6 .[…]
-
Страница 166
Document Box 6-6 OPERATION GUIDE Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper proced ure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. 1 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 3 Press the OK key . USB Memory appears. 4 Press [Menu] (the Lef t Select[…]
-
Страница 167
OPERATION GUIDE 7-1 7 S t atus / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to ch eck the status and history of jo bs and cancel the jobs being processed or wait ing to be printed. This chapter also explains how to check the remaining am ount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication. • Checking Job S tatus .[…]
-
Страница 168
Status / Job Cancel 7-2 OPERATION GUIDE Checking Job S t atus Check the st atus of jobs being proces sed or waitin g to be printe d. A vailable St atus Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Messa ge Display in four differen t screens — Print Job, Send Job, Stor e Job and Schedul ed Job. The following job[…]
-
Страница 169
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-3 7 Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. NOTE: Y ou can also check the job inform ation by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in th e menu that appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed ar e as fo[…]
-
Страница 170
Status / Job Cancel 7-4 OPERATION GUIDE Send Job S t atus screen 1 Press the Status / Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job S tatus]. 3 Press the OK key . Send Job S t atus appears. Press the U or V key to chec k the send queue. Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. NOTE: Y[…]
-
Страница 171
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-5 7 When complete job name not disp layed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select ke y) in Job Name to see the complete jo b name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in det ailed information When there is o nly one destination, press […]
-
Страница 172
Status / Job Cancel 7-6 OPERATION GUIDE Stor e Job St atus screen 1 Press the Status / Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [S tore Job S tatus]. 3 Press the OK key . S tore Job S t atus appears. Press the U or V key to chec k the store queue. Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. N[…]
-
Страница 173
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-7 7 When complete job name not disp layed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select ke y) in Job Name to see the complete jo b name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key)[…]
-
Страница 174
Status / Job Cancel 7-8 OPERATION GUIDE Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs. NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENT ER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer . A vailable Job History Screen s The job histories ar e displayed separately in three scre ens — Print Job, Send Job, St ore Job and Scheduled Job. The following[…]
-
Страница 175
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-9 7 A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job S tatu s Screen on page 7- 2 . Press the OK key or [Det ail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed inform ation of the selecte[…]
-
Страница 176
Status / Job Cancel 7-10 OPERATION GUIDE Displaying Send Job Log 1 Press the Status / Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Log]. 3 Press the OK key . Send Job Log appears. Pre ss the U or V key to chec k the send log. A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed no[…]
-
Страница 177
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-11 7 When complete job name not disp layed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select ke y) in Job Name to see the complete jo b name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in det ailed information When there is o nly one destination, press[…]
-
Страница 178
Status / Job Cancel 7-12 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key or [Det ail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed inform ation of the selected job. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed ar e as follows: Result Accepted T ime End T ime Job Name Job T ype User Name Original Pages (number of p age[…]
-
Страница 179
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-13 7 Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log histo ry by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set nu mber of jobs is reached. Displaying Job Log History Menu 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Co[…]
-
Страница 180
Status / Job Cancel 7-14 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the U or V key to select [Job Log History]. 5 Press the OK key . The Job Log Histo ry menu appears. Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent. Use the procedure below to set the destination. 1 In the Job Log History me nu, press t he U or V key to select [Destina[…]
-
Страница 181
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-15 7 2 Press the OK key . Dest. Confirm. appears. NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination.Refer to Character Entr y Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 3 Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears. Registering Destination 1 In the Destin ation menu[…]
-
Страница 182
Status / Job Cancel 7-16 OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has been changed af ter you selected the destination from the address book , [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 7-14 an d reconfirm the destination address. Automatic Job Log History T ransmission This func[…]
-
Страница 183
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-17 7 3 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. If you select [On] and press the OK key , Jobs appears. Use the numeri c keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time. 4 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu . Manual Job Log History T ransmiss[…]
-
Страница 184
Status / Job Cancel 7-18 OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Job Log History me nu, press the U or V key to select [Subject]. 2 Press the OK key . Subject appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appe ndix- 5 for details on entering charac ters. 3 Enter the destination addr ess. 4 Press the OK key . Completed . is displayed and the screen returns to […]
-
Страница 185
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-19 7 Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printi ng/waiting. The procedure for pa using and resuming jobs is explained be low. 1 Press the Status / Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job S tatus]. 3 Press the OK key . Print Job S tatus app[…]
-
Страница 186
Status / Job Cancel 7-20 OPERATION GUIDE Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to th is machin e or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their stat us. Check of Device St atus 1 Press the Status / Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Scanner], [Printer][…]
-
Страница 187
Status / Job Cancel OPERATION GUIDE 7-21 7 FA X The information (sending, wa iting, etc.) is displayed. If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log menu appears. From this screen, you ca n check or print the transmission/reception history . NOTE: If you are using a user management functio n, the menu for printing the transmission /reception […]
-
Страница 188
Status / Job Cancel 7-22 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 189
OPERATION GUIDE 8-1 8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various sett ings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. • Common Settings …….. …………………………………… ……. 8-2 • Copy Settings…………. ………………………. ………………… 8-56 • Sending Set[…]
-
Страница 190
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-2 OPERATION GUIDE Common Settings Common settings include; • How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2 • Switching the Language for Display [Langua ge] …8-2 • Default Screen …8-5 • Sound …8-6 • Display Bright. …8-7 • Original/Paper Setting s …8-8 • Switching Unit of Measurement …8-27 ?[…]
-
Страница 191
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-3 8 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Language]. 4 Press the OK key . The Language menu a ppears. The available la nguages are as follows: English Deutsch França[…]
-
Страница 192
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-4 OPERATION GUIDE If you are using on e of the optional lan guages, it is displayed in p lace of Portugues. 5 Press the U or V key to select a language. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Co mmon Settings menu. Korean Simplified Chinese T raditional Chinese Optional language Me[…]
-
Страница 193
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-5 8 Default Screen Select the screen appearin g right after start-up (defau lt screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Use the procedure below to sele ct the defau lt startup screen. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Setti[…]
-
Страница 194
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-6 OPERATION GUIDE Sound Set options for buzzer sound d uring the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settin gs and details. Th e asterisk in the table is a de fault setting. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com […]
-
Страница 195
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-7 8 8 Press the OK key . Key Confirmation appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer me nu. Display Bright. Set the brightness of the display. Use the procedure below to ad just the display brightness. 1 […]
-
Страница 196
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-8 OPERATION GUIDE Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and si ze s of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Use the procedure below to set a custom origi[…]
-
Страница 197
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-9 8 8 Press the OK key . Size En try(X) appears. 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the pa per width (X) . 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Or ig./Paper Set. menu. Size Entry(X): D b (1.97 — 14.02) J **11.23* «[…]
-
Страница 198
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-10 OPERATION GUIDE Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for th e paper feed cassette o r multi purpos e tray, select the paper size to be used as the default value. Use the procedure below to select th e paper size to be used as the default value. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press […]
-
Страница 199
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-11 8 Adding a Custom Size a nd Media T ype for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom pa per size. The custom size options are dis played on the screen to select paper. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source. Select media […]
-
Страница 200
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-12 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . The Orig./Pa per Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Custom PaperSize]. 6 Press the OK key . The Custom Pape rSize menu appears. 7 Select the paper source in which you want to set the custom size and press th[…]
-
Страница 201
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-13 8 Paper Size an d Media T ype Se tup for Ca ssettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3). The available paper sizes and me dia types are shown in the table belo w. Use the procedure below to select th e paper size and media type for ea ch ca[…]
-
Страница 202
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-14 OPERATION GUIDE Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Ca ssette 1]). Opera te in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3]) 6 The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size]. 8 Press the OK key . Cassette 1 Size appears.[…]
-
Страница 203
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-15 8 Paper Size and Media T y pe Setup for Multi Purpose T ray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Se t up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and me dia types are shown in the table belo w. NOTE: T o change to a media type ot her than Plain , refe[…]
-
Страница 204
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-16 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . The Orig./Pa per Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.]. 6 Press the OK key . The MP T r ay Set. menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to sel[…]
-
Страница 205
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-17 8 If you select [Size Entry], you ca n register a cu stom size. In the screen that ap pears, set the vertical size (Y) and horizon tal size (X) of the paper using the numeric keys. 10 Press the OK key . The screen re turns to the MP T ray Set. menu. 11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray T ype[…]
-
Страница 206
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-18 OPERATION GUIDE For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex prin ting an d media type name can be changed. Use the procedure below to set the paper weight. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to se[…]
-
Страница 207
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-19 8 4 Press the OK key . The Orig./Pa per Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Media T ype Set.]. 6 Press the OK key . Media T ype Set. menu ap pears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings. 8 Press the OK key . The menu for th e selected […]
-
Страница 208
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-20 OPERATION GUIDE 14 Press the OK key . The Print Density menu appears. 15 Press the U or V key to select the print density . 16 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected p aper type. When the selected paper ty pe is [Custom 1 to 8], you can further set whether to[…]
-
Страница 209
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-21 8 22 Press the OK key . Name Entry is displayed. Enter the name of the custom p aper type. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering charac ters. 23 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom pap er ty pe[…]
-
Страница 210
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-22 OPERATION GUIDE Default Paper Sour ce Select the default paper source from Ca ssette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional side feeder installed. Use the procedure below to sele ct the defau lt paper source. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V […]
-
Страница 211
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-23 8 Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, th e paper so urce that is automatically selected can be limited by media types.I f Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper lo aded in the specific si ze is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper so urce […]
-
Страница 212
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-24 OPERATION GUIDE Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Pre print, and Letterhead , pu nch-holes might not be aligne d or the pri nt direction might be upside- down depending on how originals ar e set and the combination o f copying functions. In such a case, select [A dj. PrintDirect] t o adjust the pr […]
-
Страница 213
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-25 8 Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . T[…]
-
Страница 214
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-26 OPERATION GUIDE Preset Limit Restrict the num ber of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the nu mber of copies. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu ap[…]
-
Страница 215
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-27 8 Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metr ic for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to chan ge the input units. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or […]
-
Страница 216
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-28 OPERATION GUIDE Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when erro r ha s occurred. The possible erro rs and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not po ssible for the selected paper size and media type. Paper Mismatch Error Select t[…]
-
Страница 217
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-29 8 4 Press the OK key . The Error Handling menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex PagerError]. 6 Press the OK key . Duplex PaperError appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the method to handle if dupl ex is disabled. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen re[…]
-
Страница 218
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-30 OPERATION GUIDE Function Default s Defaults are the values automatically se t after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copyin g and sending. Settin g the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier . Orig.Orient ation Set the or[…]
-
Страница 219
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-31 8 6 Press the OK key . Orig.Orienta tion appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [ c T op Edge T op] or [ d T op Edge Left] . 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaul ts. The available default[…]
-
Страница 220
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-32 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. 6 Press the OK key . Continuous Scan appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Original Image Set the default original document type .[…]
-
Страница 221
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-33 8 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. 6 Press the OK key . Orig inal Image ap pears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [T ext+Photo], [Photo], [T ext] or [f or OCR]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen re[…]
-
Страница 222
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-34 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution]. 6 Press the OK key . Scan Resolution appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [200x100dpi Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [2 00x400dpi S.Fin], [300x300dpi], [400×40 0dpi U.Fin] or [6 00x600dp i].[…]
-
Страница 223
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-35 8 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection]. 6 Press the OK key . Color Selection appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select[…]
-
Страница 224
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-36 OPERATION GUIDE File Format Select the default file type to send the sca nned orig inals. The available default settings are shown belo w. NOTE: Refer to p age 5-10 for file formats. Use the procedure below to sele ct the defau lt file format. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common […]
-
Страница 225
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-37 8 6 Press the OK key . File Format appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [PDF ], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Density Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below. Use the p[…]
-
Страница 226
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-38 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Press the OK key . Density appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Zoom Select the enlarged /reduced default when paper size/sendi ng size changed a fter the originals set. Th e[…]
-
Страница 227
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-39 8 6 Press the OK key . Zoom appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [100% ] or [Auto]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. File Name Entry Set an automatically ente red name (default) for jobs. Add i tional informatio n such as Date a[…]
-
Страница 228
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-40 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. 6 Press the OK key . File Name En try appears. Enter the document name (up to 32 char acters). 7 Press the OK key . Additional Info appear[…]
-
Страница 229
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-41 8 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [ Subject/Body]. 6 Press the OK key . Subject Entry a ppears. Enter the e-mail subject (up to 60 […]
-
Страница 230
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-42 OPERATION GUIDE Collate Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings. NOTE: Refer to p age 3-17 for Collate/Offset. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate /Offset settings. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key[…]
-
Страница 231
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-43 8 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default . The tabl e below shows the available setting s. NOTE: Refer to p age 4-10 f or EcoPrint . Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting. 1 In the[…]
-
Страница 232
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-44 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Press the OK key . EcoPrint appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 2 in 1 Layout Select the default va lue for layout when [2 in 1] is sele cted fo r Combine. Items available for th[…]
-
Страница 233
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-45 8 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [2 in 1 Layout] . 8 Press the OK key . 2 in 1 Layout appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ g L to R f T to B] or [ e R to L]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the D[…]
-
Страница 234
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-46 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to se[…]
-
Страница 235
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-47 8 Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1] is selected fo r Combine. Items available for the defa ult value are as follows: Use the procedure below to select th e default value for border line. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Setting[…]
-
Страница 236
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-48 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Press the OK key . Border Li ne appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ N one], [ l Solid Line], [ m Dott ed Line] or [ n Positioning Mark]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Orig. Binding Select the default value for the bind ing[…]
-
Страница 237
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-49 8 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Binding] . 8 Press the OK key . Orig. Binding appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ o Lef[…]
-
Страница 238
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-50 OPERATION GUIDE Finish Binding Select the default value for th e binding edge of the finished cop ies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2 -sided>>2- sided] is selected for Du plex. Items ava ilable for th e default value are as follows: Use the procedure below to select the defau lt va lue for the binding ed[…]
-
Страница 239
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-51 8 8 Press the OK key . Finish Binding appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ o Left/Right] or [ p To p ] . 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Image Quality Select the default value for ima ge quality when File Format is selected. S[…]
-
Страница 240
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-52 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Image Quality]. 8 Press the OK key . Image Quality appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select from [1 Low (High Comp)] to [ 5 High(Low Com p)]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns[…]
-
Страница 241
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-53 8 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Color TIFF Comp.]. 8 Press the OK key . Color TIF F Comp. appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [[…]
-
Страница 242
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-54 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key . The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key . The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to se[…]
-
Страница 243
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-55 8 Login Operation Specify the ch aracter entr y method in t he login screen that appea rs when user m anagement is enabled. Use the procedure below to ad just the Login Operation. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Setti[…]
-
Страница 244
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-56 OPERATION GUIDE Copy Settings The following s ettings are available for co pying funct ions. • Photo Processing …8-56 • Paper Selection …8 -57 • Auto Paper Selection …8-58 • Auto % Priority …8-58 • Select Key Set …8-60 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the setti[…]
-
Страница 245
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-57 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [ Dithe ring(Normal)] or [Ditheri ng(Rough)] . 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy men u. Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. The tab le below shows the available settings. Use the procedure below to set th[…]
-
Страница 246
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-58 OPERATION GUIDE Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection me thod when the zo om changes. The tab le below shows the available settings. Use the procedure below to specify the ac tion performed for Au to Paper Selection. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U[…]
-
Страница 247
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-59 8 The table below shows the availabl e settings. The de fault setting is Off . Use the procedure below to specif y the automatic zoom priority. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key . The Copy menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Auto […]
-
Страница 248
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-60 OPERATION GUIDE Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. You can register one of th e following functions to each key. •N o n e • Paper Selection • Collate •D u p l e x •Z o o m • Combine • Origin[…]
-
Страница 249
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-61 8 4 Press the OK key . Select Key Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. 6 Press the OK key . This displays the function selection screen for the flex ible key selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [L eft] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select the […]
-
Страница 250
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-62 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following send ing function option s. • Select Key Set …8-62 • DestinationCheck …8-64 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrato r privileges. Select Key Set I[…]
-
Страница 251
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-63 8 Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Send]. 2 Press the OK key . The Send menu appear s. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . Select Key Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [L[…]
-
Страница 252
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-64 OPERATION GUIDE DestinationCheck Set whether or not to display the destination confirmati on screen before tr ansmission. The setting items are as follows: 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Send]. 2 Press the OK key . The Send menu appear s. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Destinati[…]
-
Страница 253
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-65 8 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu.[…]
-
Страница 254
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-66 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Settings The following s ettings are available for Do cument Box. • Select Key Set …8-66 Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Se lect key, you can quickly se t the function when printing fro m or saving to a document box. You can register one o […]
-
Страница 255
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-67 8 Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Document Box]. 2 Press the OK key . The Document Box menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . Select Key Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V k[…]
-
Страница 256
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-68 OPERATION GUIDE IMPORTANT: If you try to set th e function tha t is registered to the other flexible key, you ca nnot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed. This function is already registered.[…]
-
Страница 257
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-69 8 Printer Settings Printing from computers, settings are gene rally made on the application software scre en. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to custo mize the machine. • Emu l ation Set …8-69 • EcoPrint …8-72 • Override A4/L TR …8-73 • Dupl[…]
-
Страница 258
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-70 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below to select th e emulation. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key . The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Emuration Set.]. 4 Press the OK key . Emuration Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select[…]
-
Страница 259
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-71 8 When KPDL Is Selected for Emu lation When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whethe r or no t to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off . Use the procedure below to ma ke the setting. 1 In Emulation Set, press the U or V ke y to selec t [KPDL]. 2 Press the OK key . KPDL Error R […]
-
Страница 260
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-72 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . Alt. Emulation appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select the printer for alternative emulation. 4 Press the OK key . KPDL Error R pt appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.[…]
-
Страница 261
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-73 8 4 Press the OK key . EcoPrint appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Override A4/L TR Select whether to treat A4 size an d Letter, which are similar in size , as the same size when printin […]
-
Страница 262
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-74 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the OK key . Override A4/L TR appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Duplex Select binding orientation fo r duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings. Use the procedure[…]
-
Страница 263
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-75 8 4 Press the OK key . Duplex appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Shor t Edge]. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. Use the procedure below to specif […]
-
Страница 264
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-76 OPERATION GUIDE Orient ation Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape . Use the procedure below to set the default orient ation for printing. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key . The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orientat[…]
-
Страница 265
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-77 8 FormFeed T imeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine ma y sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the pr eset timeout passes, the machine automatica lly prints paper. T he op tions are between 5 and […]
-
Страница 266
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-78 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below to specify a LF action. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key . The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [LF Action]. 4 Press the OK key . LF Action appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [LF Only], […]
-
Страница 267
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-79 8 Use the procedure below to specify a CR action. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key . The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [CR A ction]. 4 Press the OK key . 5 Press the U or V key to select [CR Only], [LF and CR] or […]
-
Страница 268
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-80 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below to set Paper Fee d Mode. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key . The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Feed Mode ]. 4 Press the OK key . Paper Feed Mode appe ars. 5 Press the U or V key to sel[…]
-
Страница 269
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-81 8 Printing Report s/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default se ttings for printing the result reports can also be configur ed. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can onl y print by logging in wit h adm inistrator privilege s. Printing Report s[…]
-
Страница 270
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-82 OPERATION GUIDE Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine. Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Report]. 2 Press the OK key . The Repor t menu appe ars. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Report Print].[…]
-
Страница 271
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-83 8 6 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown is the one when S tatus Page is selected. 7 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). The selected report is ou tput. Acce pted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu. NOTE: When accept ance of jo bs is proh[…]
-
Страница 272
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-84 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. 4 Press the OK key . Service Setting appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Service S tatus] or [Network S tatus]. 6 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown i s th[…]
-
Страница 273
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-85 8 Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The ta ble below shows the available settings . The default setting is Error On ly . Use the procedure below to send a Result Report. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to se[…]
-
Страница 274
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-86 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. The Send Result menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [E -mail/Folder]. E- mail/Folder appear s. 7 Press the U or V ke y to s el e ct [ Off ] , [ O n] o r [ E rr o r Only]. 8 Press the OK key . A Result Report is sent. Completed. is displayed[…]
-
Страница 275
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-87 8 Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and co nduct machine maintenance. • Copy Denst. Adj. …8-87 • Send/Box Density …8-88 • Correct. Bk Line …8-89 • New Developer…8-90 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with admi[…]
-
Страница 276
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-88 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Press the OK key . This displays the density selection screen for the mo de selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select th e densit y from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur[…]
-
Страница 277
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-89 8 7 Press the U or V key to select th e densit y from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black strea ks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when[…]
-
Страница 278
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-90 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [C orrect. Bk Line]. 4 Press the OK key . Correct. Bk Line appe ars. 5 Press the U or V key to select [O ff], [On(Low)] or [On(High)]. 6 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adj[…]
-
Страница 279
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-91 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [New Developer]. 6 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. 7 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). Completed. is displayed and th e screen returns to the Adju st/ Maint. menu. New Developer. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ][…]
-
Страница 280
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-92 OPERATION GUIDE Date/T imer Date/Timer settings include: • Date/T ime …8-92 • Date Format …8-95 • T ime Zone …8-97 • Summer T ime …8-99 • Auto Error Clear …8-101 • Auto Sleep …8 -103 • Auto Panel Reset …8-106 • Low Power Timer …8-108 • Unusable T ime …8-109 NOTE: If user login a[…]
-
Страница 281
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-93 8 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. 4 The Date Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date/ T ime]. 6 Press the OK key . The screen to enter the date of Date/T ime appears. […]
-
Страница 282
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-94 OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application ( p age 8-151 ) is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial f unctions will be unavailable. Are you sure ? message is displayed. T o change the date/time, press [Y es](the Left Select key).[…]
-
Страница 283
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-95 8 Date Format Select the display format of ye ar, month, and date. The ye ar is displayed in Western n otation. Use the procedure below to select th e date format. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appe[…]
-
Страница 284
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-96 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to th e Date Settings menu.[…]
-
Страница 285
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-97 8 T ime Zone Set the time difference in th e lo cation you are fr om GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time diffe rence. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select[…]
-
Страница 286
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-98 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to th e Date Settings menu. NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear .[…]
-
Страница 287
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-99 8 Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. Use the procedure below to set Summer Time . 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select[…]
-
Страница 288
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-100 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to th e Date Settings menu.[…]
-
Страница 289
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-101 8 Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait fo r the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode , automatically clear the er ror after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared. Cannot duplex print on t[…]
-
Страница 290
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-102 OPERATION GUIDE When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 4 The T imer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Aut o Err . Clear]. 6 Press the OK key . Aut[…]
-
Страница 291
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-103 8 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [T imer Setting], and press the OK key . When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the[…]
-
Страница 292
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-104 OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: T ime remaining befo re Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary . Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to se[…]
-
Страница 293
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-105 8 Sleep Timer If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, se t the a mount of time to wait before Auto Sleep . Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 15 minutes. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V ke[…]
-
Страница 294
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-106 OPERATION GUIDE in minutes. Y ou cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the T imer Settings menu. Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automati cal ly reset settings and return to the default setting. NOT[…]
-
Страница 295
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-107 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Panel Reset]. 6 Press the OK key . Auto Panel Reset appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the T imer Settings menu. Panel Reset T imer If you select [On] for Auto Pan[…]
-
Страница 296
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-108 OPERATION GUIDE 4 The T imer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Panel Reset Ti m e r] . 6 Press the OK key . Panel Reset T imer a ppears. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Panel Reset T imer . Set the amount of time before resetting the message dis play on the panel in seconds. Y ou cannot u[…]
-
Страница 297
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-109 8 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 4 The T imer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Low Po wer T imer]. 6 Press the OK key . […]
-
Страница 298
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-110 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key . The Com mon Settings me nu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [T imer Setting], and press the OK key . When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Ri[…]
-
Страница 299
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-111 8 10 Press the OK key . End T ime appears. 11 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the End T ime. 12 Press the OK key . Unlock Code appears. 13 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the unlock co de. 14 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the T imer S[…]
-
Страница 300
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-112 OPERATION GUIDE Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-T ouch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch ke ys. The saved destinations can be chang ed. The destinations are availa ble for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Tr ansmission (optional). Adding an Individual Destina[…]
-
Страница 301
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-113 8 6 Press the U or V key to select [Add Address]. 7 Press the OK key . Add Address appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Contact]. 9 Press the OK key . This displays the screen for editing destinations. NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has already been registered, the screen will […]
-
Страница 302
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-114 OPERATION GUIDE Entering E-mail Address 1 Press the Y or Z key to display E-mail Address. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the e-mail address. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Boo k or the One- touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28 . 4 […]
-
Страница 303
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-115 8 Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Folder(SMB) or Folder(FTP). 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the host name. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Boo k or the One- touc[…]
-
Страница 304
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-116 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the OK key . Path appears. 5 Enter the p ath name. 6 Press the OK key . Login User Name appears. 7 Enter the login user nam e. 8 Press the OK key . Login Password appears. 9 Enter the login p assword. 10 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. NOTE: If the screen for confirming t[…]
-
Страница 305
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-117 8 11 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). This makes a connection with the entered destinat ion. If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the sc reen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered. If the connection […]
-
Страница 306
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-118 OPERATION GUIDE Adding a Group Compile two or more indivi duals into a group. Designation s in the group can be ad ded at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 gr oups can be added in the Address Book. NOTE: If user login administration is en abled, you can only ed it d estinations in the Address B[…]
-
Страница 307
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-119 8 7 Press the OK key . Add Address appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Group]. 9 Press the OK key . This displays the screen for editing groups. NOTE: If the maximum num ber of group s has already been registered, t he screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and re turn to the Add[…]
-
Страница 308
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-120 OPERATION GUIDE Entering Group Member 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Group Member. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays the list of destina tions registered to the group. 3 Press [Menu] (the Right Se lect key). The group editing menu a ppears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Add Member]. 5 Pr[…]
-
Страница 309
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-121 8 NOTE: If you s elect an indiv idual destinatio n that has already been registered to the group, the screen will display This addr ess is alread y registered. and return to the screen of step 7. Deleting member from group To delete a member register ed to the group, follow the proced ure below. […]
-
Страница 310
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-122 OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address nu mber . 4 Press the OK key . The address number is registered. NOTE: If you enter an address nu mber that is already r[…]
-
Страница 311
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-123 8 4 Press the OK key . The Address Book list screen appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to edit. 6 Press [Menu] (the Right Se lect key). Menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Detail/Edit]. 8 Press the OK key . This displays the screen for editing the selec[…]
-
Страница 312
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-124 OPERATION GUIDE Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys an d you ca n register 2 destinations to each of them. The one-touch ke ys are arranged as sh own below: NOTE: Refer to One-T ouch Key on page 3-7 for how to use th em. Registering new dest ination Use the procedure below to […]
-
Страница 313
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-125 8 Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destin ations you added to One-touch Key. Use the procedure below to ed it the one-touch key. 1 In the basic screen, pre ss the one-touch key where you want to edit the destin ation and hold it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears. The screen show[…]
-
Страница 314
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-126 OPERATION GUIDE 7 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. 8 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key , overwriting the pr evious one. Registered. is displayed and th e screen returns to the ba sic screen. Overwrite. Are you sure? z No. 1 [ Yes ] […]
-
Страница 315
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-127 8 Rest arting the System Restart the printer without turning the ma in power switch off. Use this to de al with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the comp uter restart.) Use the procedure below to re start the system. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [S[…]
-
Страница 316
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-128 OPERATION GUIDE Network Setup The following network settings are available. • LAN Interface Set up …8-128 • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8 -129 • TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8 -129 • NetW are Setup …8-130 • AppleT alk Setup …8-132 • Protocol Detail …8-135 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the […]
-
Страница 317
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-129 8 6 Press the OK key . LAN Interface appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the desired LAN interface. The available LAN interfaces ar e as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Ha lf 100Base- Full 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setti[…]
-
Страница 318
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-130 OPERATION GUIDE 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting] . 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key . The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPv6 Setting]. 8 Press[…]
-
Страница 319
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-131 8 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 2 The System men[…]
-
Страница 320
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-132 OPERATION GUIDE Ether-II 802.2 SNAP 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. For detailed infor mation on restarting th e system, refer to Restarting the System on p age 8-127 . AppleT alk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. Refer to AppleTalk Se[…]
-
Страница 321
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-133 8 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-SCAN ]. 6 Press the OK key . The WSD-SCAN men u appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu.[…]
-
Страница 322
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-134 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting] . 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-PRIN T]. 6 Press the OK key . The WSD-PRINT menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed a[…]
-
Страница 323
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-135 8 Protocol Det ail Make other network related setting s. Item Description Default Se tting Restarting the System* NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive document s using NetBEUI. On × LPD Se lect whether or not to receive document s using LPD as the network protocol. On z FTP (Server) Select […]
-
Страница 324
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-136 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select […]
-
Страница 325
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-137 8 6 Press the OK key . The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Protocol Detail]. 8 Press the OK key . The Protocol Det ail menu appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to make settings. 10 Press the OK key . This displays the setting scree[…]
-
Страница 326
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-138 OPERATION GUIDE Network Security The network security functions can be set up to prote ct printer operation an d the print data. The following network security settings are available. • SSL Setting …8-138 • SNMPv3 Setting …8-143 • IPSec Setting …8-144 SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL n etwork se[…]
-
Страница 327
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-139 8 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Sec ure Protocol]. 6 Press the OK key . Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [SSL] . 8 Press the OK key . SSL appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 10 Press the OK ke[…]
-
Страница 328
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-140 OPERATION GUIDE 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting] . 4 Press the OK key . The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Sec ure Protocol]. 6 Press the OK key . Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPP Security]. 8 Press the OK […]
-
Страница 329
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-141 8 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear . Then, enter the user ID and p assword to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 2 The System men[…]
-
Страница 330
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-142 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Press the U or V key to select [HTTP /HTTPS] or [HTTPS only]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Se cure Protocol menu. LDAP Security Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The defa ult setting is Of f . Use the procedure below to ma ke the setting. 1 […]
-
Страница 331
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-143 8 6 Press the OK key . Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [LDAP Security ]. 8 Press the OK key . LDAP Security appe ars. 9 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [LDAPv3/TLS] or [LDAP over SSL ]. 10 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Se […]
-
Страница 332
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-144 OPERATION GUIDE IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. The defau lt setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off . Use the procedure below to ma ke the setting. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management[…]
-
Страница 333
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-145 8 If you select [On] and press the OK key , Rule Setting appe ars. Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. Rule Setting: a b ****************** *** 2 O n 1 *Off[…]
-
Страница 334
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-146 OPERATION GUIDE Interface Block Setting This allows yo u to protect t his machine by blocking the interface w ith external de vices such as USB hosts or optional interf aces. The following interface block settings are available: • USB Host (USB memory slot setting) • USB Device (USB interface setting) • Opt[…]
-
Страница 335
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-147 8 6 Press the OK key . USB Host appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu. USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and prot ects the USB interface con nect or (B1) (USB Devic[…]
-
Страница 336
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-148 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Press the OK key . USB Device appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. 8 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System me nu. USB Device: a b ****************** *** 2 Block 1 *Unblock[…]
-
Страница 337
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-149 8 Optional interface (Optiona l interface card setting) This locks and prot ects the optional inte rf ace slots (OPT1). The defa ult setting is Unblock . Use the procedure below to specif y the optional interface settin g. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System]. 2[…]
-
Страница 338
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-150 OPERATION GUIDE Security Level (Secu rity Level setting) The Security L evel setting is primarily a me nu option use d by service personnel f or maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this me nu.[…]
-
Страница 339
Default Setting (System Menu ) OPERATION GUIDE 8-151 8 Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this ma chine. Op Functions Although nothing is currently displayed, when the optional functions that will be re leased in the futu re is installed, the licenses can be set u sing this menu.[…]
-
Страница 340
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-152 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 341
OPERATION GUIDE 9-1 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cle aning and toner replacement. • Cleaning ………….. …………………………… ……………. ……… 9-2 • T oner Container ……… …………………………………… ……… 9-5[…]
-
Страница 342
Maintenance 9-2 OPERATION GUIDE Cleaning Clean the machine regu larly to ensure optimum output quality. CAUTION: For safety, always unplu g the power cord be fore clean ing the machin e. Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document pr ocessor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampen ed with alcohol or mild detergent. IMPORTANT: Do not use thin[…]
-
Страница 343
Maintenance OPERATION GUIDE 9-3 9 2 Lift the developer unit together with th e toner container out of the machin e. 3 Remove the drum unit from the mach ine by holding the green levers with both hands. NOTE: The drum unit is sens itive to light. Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes. 4 Place the drum unit flat on a clean, l[…]
-
Страница 344
Maintenance 9-4 OPERATION GUIDE 6 On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner (green) back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire, then return it to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION ). IMPORTANT: Remove the fix ing tape on the main charger cleaner before clean ing for the first time. After cleaning, make sure you restor e[…]
-
Страница 345
Maintenance OPERATION GUIDE 9-5 9 T oner Cont ainer When the message display disp lays Add toner , replace the toner. Every time you replace the tone r container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality. CAUTION: Do not attempt to incine rate the toner container or the wast e tone r box. Dangerous […]
-
Страница 346
Maintenance 9-6 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Remove the label from the toner co ntainer . 5 Install the new toner co ntainer in the machine . Push firmly on the top of the cont ainer at the positions marked PUSH, until you hear a click. 6 T urn the lock lever to the lock position. 7 Close the front cover .[…]
-
Страница 347
Maintenance OPERATION GUIDE 9-7 9 Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet. We recommend you consult with your dealer abo ut the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine i[…]
-
Страница 348
Maintenance 9-8 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 349
OPERATION GUIDE 10-1 10 T roubleshooting This chapter explains how to so lve problems wi th the machine. • Solving Malfunctions …. ………………………. ………………. 10-2 • Responding to Error Messages …. ……….. ………… ……. 10-5 • Clearing Paper Jams …………… ………….. ………… ……. 10-1 1[…]
-
Страница 350
Troubleshooting 10-2 OPERATION GUIDE Solving Malfunctions The table below provides gene ral guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedure s indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Re[…]
-
Страница 351
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-3 10 Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patt erns and not aligned uniformly). Is the original a printed photograph? Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-12 Printouts are not clear. Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original? Select appropriate image qu ality . 5-12 Printouts are di[…]
-
Страница 352
Troubleshooting 10-4 OPERATION GUIDE Cannot prin t. Is the m achine plugged in? Plug th e power cord into an AC outlet. — Is the mach ine powered on? T ur n on the main power switch. 3-2 Is the print er cable connected? Connect the correct printer cable securely . 2-5 W as the machine po wered on before the printer cable was connected? Power on t[…]
-
Страница 353
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-5 10 Responding to Error Messages If the control panel d isplays any of these message s, follow the corresp onding procedure. Alphanumeric Error Message Checkpoint s Corrective Actions Reference Page Load paper in cassette 1. Is the indic ated cassette out of paper ? Load pap er . 2-29 Load paper in MP Tray. Is th[…]
-
Страница 354
Troubleshooting 10-6 OPERATION GUIDE Incorrect Login User Name or Password. Job Is canceled. – Enter correct login user nam e or password. — Job Accounting restriction exce eded. Job is canceled. Is the accept able printing count res tricted by Job Accounting ex ceeded? The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounti[…]
-
Страница 355
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-7 10 Scanner memory is full. Job is canceled. – Scanning cannot be perfor med due to insufficient memory of scanner . The job is canceled. Press the OK key . — Is the accepta ble scanning count exceeded? Press the OK key to print, send or store the scann ed pages. Press the STOP key to cancel printing, sending[…]
-
Страница 356
Troubleshooting 10-8 OPERATION GUIDE Send error. #### – 1 105: E-mail — The SMTP pr otocol setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMTP protocol setting. Scan to PC (SMB) — SMB setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMB se tting. Scan to PC (FTP) — FTP setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the […]
-
Страница 357
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-9 10 The phone rece iver is off the hook. Hang Up. – Put down the receiver . — File is not found. Job is canceled. – The specified file is not found. The job is canceled. Pre ss the OK key . — Top tray is full of Paper. Remove the paper. – Remove paper fro m the top tray , and press the OK key to resume […]
-
Страница 358
Troubleshooting 10-10 OPERATION GUIDE Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes If an error lamp flashes, press [ Sta tus/Job Cancel] to check an error me ssage. If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pr essed or th e error lamp flashes for 1.5 seco nds, check the following. Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actio[…]
-
Страница 359
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-11 10 Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refe r to the following inform ation below. Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs, th e error messag e displays the loc[…]
-
Страница 360
Troubleshooting 10-12 OPERATION GUIDE 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray. 2 Reload the MP tray . Open and close the top cov er to clear the error and the mach ine warms up and resumes printing. Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder Follow the step s below to c lear paper jams in pap er cassette or paper feeder . 1 Pull out the cassette or optional pape[…]
-
Страница 361
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-13 10 2 Open the duplexer’s cover in front of the machine and remove any jamm ed pape r . Open the duplexer’s cover at the rear of the machine and remove any jammed p aper . 3 Push the ca ssette ba ck in securely , and open and close the top cover to clear the error . The machine warms up and resumes printing […]
-
Страница 362
Troubleshooting 10-14 OPERATION GUIDE Inside the Machine 1 Pull the paper cassett e all the way out of the machine. Remove any partially fed paper . 2 Open the front cover , and lif t the developer unit together with the toner contain er out of the machine. 3 Remove the drum unit from the mach ine by holding the green levers with both hands. CAUTIO[…]
-
Страница 363
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-15 10 4 If the jammed pape r appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it along the normal running direction of the pa per . 5 Return the drum unit to its position, aligning th e guides at both ends with th e slots in the machine. 6 Insert the developer unit togeth er with the toner container , back into the machine.[…]
-
Страница 364
Troubleshooting 10-16 OPERATION GUIDE If the paper is jammed insi de the fuser unit, open the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it out. 2 Close the rear cover , and open and close the top cover to clear the error . The machine wa rms up and resumes printing. Optional Document Processor Follow the step s below to c lear paper jams in the o[…]
-
Страница 365
Troubleshooting OPERATION GUIDE 10-17 10 4 Open the document processor . 5 Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside t he machine . 6 Close the document processo r . 7 Place the originals .[…]
-
Страница 366
Troubleshooting 10-18 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 367
OPERATION GUIDE 11-1 1 1 Management This chapter explains the following operations. • User Login Administrati on …………… ……………. ………… 1 1-2 • Job Accounting ………… ………….. ………….. ………… ….. 1 1-13 • Checking the Counter .. ………………………. ………… ….. 1 1-37[…]
-
Страница 368
Management 11-2 OPERATION GUIDE User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on th is machine. Enter correct l ogin user name and password for user au thentication to log in. Access are in three levels — User, Ad ministrator, and Mach in e Administrator. The security levels ca n be modified only […]
-
Страница 369
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-3 11 Use the procedure below to en able user login administration. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a pp ears. Enter[…]
-
Страница 370
Management 11-4 OPERATION GUIDE 7 Press the OK key . User Login appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.], and th en press the OK key . Select [Off ] to disable user login administration. If you select [Netwk Authentic.], enter the host name and domain name of the auth entication server (up to 6 4 and 256 ch[…]
-
Страница 371
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-5 11 Login/Logout Once you enable user login admini stra tion, a login user name and password entry screen appears ea ch time you use this machine. Login Log in using the proced ure below. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 If the screen below ap pears during th[…]
-
Страница 372
Management 11-6 OPERATION GUIDE Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (i nclud ing the default login user name). The table be low explains the user information to be registered. NOTE: By default, one of each default user with ma chine administrator right s and ad ministrator pr ivileges is already stored. Th e following are[…]
-
Страница 373
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-7 11 3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key . 4 If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a pp ears. Enter your lo gin user name and p assword and then pres s [Login]. For this, you need to lo g in with administrator […]
-
Страница 374
Management 11-8 OPERATION GUIDE 10 Enter the user name and pr ess the OK key , enter the login user na me in the next screen, and then press the OK key . 11 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then press the OK key . Select [Detail] and pre ss the OK key to see information of the registered users. 12 In Local User List, press the U or V key t[…]
-
Страница 375
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-9 11 17 Press the Z key to select [Acc ount Name:], press [Change] (the Righ t Select key), select the account, and then press the OK key . NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and the device adm inistrator does not log in, [Change] is not displayed. 18 After enter ing the user information, press the OK k[…]
-
Страница 376
Management 11-10 OPERATION GUIDE 4 In the User/Job Account menu , press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.]. 5 Press the OK key . The User Log in Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Local User List]. 7 Press the OK key . Local User Li st appears. The procedure dif fers depen ding on the details to be edited. Changing user in[…]
-
Страница 377
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-11 11 5 The overwrite confirmation scre en appears. Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List. Deleting a user 1 Press the U or V key to select the us er you want to delete, and then p ress [Menu] (the Right Se lect key). 2 Press the U or V key to s[…]
-
Страница 378
Management 11-12 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below to pr oce ss jobs sent from unknown users. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and t[…]
-
Страница 379
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-13 11 Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/pr int count accumulate d by individual accounts by assig ning an ID to each account. Job accoun ting helps th e following activ ities in busine ss organiza tions. • Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts. • Availability for account IDs with as many as eig[…]
-
Страница 380
Management 11-14 OPERATION GUIDE 3 If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a pp ears. Enter your lo gin user name and p assword and then pres s [Login]. For this, you need to lo g in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 1 1-6 for the default login user nam e and password. NOTE: • Refer t[…]
-
Страница 381
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-15 11 Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entr y screen appears each time you use this ma chine. Use the procedure below to log in and logout. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 In the screen below, ente r the account ID using the nume[…]
-
Страница 382
Management 11-16 OPERATION GUIDE Managing Account s This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are requ ired. Use the procedure below to re gister a new account. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel.[…]
-
Страница 383
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-17 11 5 Press the OK key . The Job A ccount. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Account. List]. 7 Press the OK key . Account. List appears. 8 Press [Menu] (the Right Se lect key), press the U or V key to select [Add A ccount], and th en press the OK key . 9 Enter the account na me and press the OK key[…]
-
Страница 384
Management 11-18 OPERATION GUIDE Managing Account s This changes the registered acco unt information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to ma nage accounts. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Me thod on Appendix-5 fo r details on enteri ng characters. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu[…]
-
Страница 385
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-19 11 7 Press the OK key . Account. List appears. The procedure diffe rs depending on the deta ils to be edited. Changing account infor mation 1 Press the U or V key to select the account whose information you want to change , and then press the OK key. 2 Press the Y or Z key to sel ect the it em you want to change, pr[…]
-
Страница 386
Management 11-20 OPERATION GUIDE Deleting an account 1 Press the U or V key to select the ac count you want to delete, and th en press [Menu] (the Right Select key). 2 Press the U or V key to select [Delete]. 3 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. 4 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). The account is deleted. Completed. is displayed […]
-
Страница 387
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-21 11 3 If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a pp ears. Enter your lo gin user name and p assword and then pres s [Login]. For this, you need to lo g in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 1 1-6 for the default login user nam e and password. NOTE: • Refe[…]
-
Страница 388
Management 11-22 OPERATION GUIDE 11 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the Default Settin g menu. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine b y account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ d epending on whether [Split] or [[…]
-
Страница 389
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-23 11 Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Use the procedure below to se lect a restriction method. 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 o f Managing Accounts on page 11-16 . 2 In Account. List, press the U or V key to select the account to which yo u want to set restriction of use, and then press […]
-
Страница 390
Management 11-24 OPERATION GUIDE If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit number of p ages in the next screen, and then press the OK key . 5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary . 6 Press the OK key again. A conf irmation screen appears. 7 Press [Y es] (the Lef t Select key). The restriction of use is changed. Registered. is dis[…]
-
Страница 391
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-25 11 3 If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a pp ears. Enter your lo gin user name and p assword and then pres s [Login]. For this, you need to lo g in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 1 1-6 for the default login user nam e and password. NOTE: • Refe[…]
-
Страница 392
Management 11-26 OPERATION GUIDE 11 Press the OK key . Completed. is displayed and the screen retur ns to the Default Settin g menu.[…]
-
Страница 393
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-27 11 Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change th e default restrictions on the number of sheets use d. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments. The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managi ng the Copier/ Printer Counts […]
-
Страница 394
Management 11-28 OPERATION GUIDE Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits. 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key . 3 If user login ad ministration is disabled, the user authenticat ion screen a p[…]
-
Страница 395
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-29 11 7 Press the OK key . The Default Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Counter Limit]. 9 Press the OK key . Counter Limit ap pears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on th e number of sheet s, and then press the OK key . 11 Use the numer[…]
-
Страница 396
Management 11-30 OPERATION GUIDE Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printe d. Counts a r e classified into Total Jo b Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be sta rted after resetti ng the coun t data which was st ored for a certain period of time. Types of th e counts are as follows. T ot al Job[…]
-
Страница 397
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-31 11 NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering char acters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Lef t Select key) to select the au thentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu , press the U or V key to select [Job[…]
-
Страница 398
Management 11-32 OPERATION GUIDE 10 T o reset the coun ter , press the U or V key to select [Counter Reset]. 11 Press the OK key . A confirmation screen appears. 12 Press [Y es ] (the Lef t Se lect key). The counter is reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the T otal Accounting menu. Each Job Accounting/Resett ing the Counter Thi[…]
-
Страница 399
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-33 11 NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering char acters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Lef t Select key) to select the au thentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu , press the U or V key to select [Job[…]
-
Страница 400
Management 11-34 OPERATION GUIDE If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Y or Z key to switch the counted ite ms. If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function, the upper limit on the number of output sheets is also displaye d. 11 After co nfirming the content, press the OK key . The screen returns to the menu for […]
-
Страница 401
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-35 11 Printing an A ccounting Report Total pages counted at all releva nt account s can be printed as an accounti ng report. Reports have different for mats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administer ed. When Split is selected for Ma naging the Copier/Printer Count For the count by paper size, the[…]
-
Страница 402
Management 11-36 OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering char acters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Lef t Select key) to select the au thentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu , press the U or V key to select [Job Ac[…]
-
Страница 403
Management OPERATION GUIDE 11-37 11 Checking the Counter You can check the number of page s printed and scanned. The number is counted by the followi ng items: 1 Press the System Menu/Counte r key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Counter], and then press th e OK key . 3 Press the U or[…]
-
Страница 404
Management 11-38 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the Y or Z key to check the count. 5 After completing checki ng the count, press th e OK key . The screen returns to the menu for the account. Printed Pages: C b Copy: 1/4 1234567[…]
-
Страница 405
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-1 Appendix • Optional Equipment … …………………………… ….. Appendix-2 • Character Entry Method ……….. ………… ………… Appendix-5 • Paper ……………….. ………………………. …………… Appendix-9 • S pecifications …….. ………………………. …………. A[…]
-
Страница 406
Appendix-2 OPERATION GUIDE Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is availabl e for the machine. Document Processor (DP-1 10) Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying. For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on pa g[…]
-
Страница 407
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-3 NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory . Precautions for Handling t he Memory Module To protect electron ic pa rts, discharge static electricity from your body by tou ching a water pipe (fauc[…]
-
Страница 408
Appendix-4 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Remove the memory module fr om its pa ckage. 5 Aligning the cuto uts of the memor y module with the matching keys of the so cket, carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place. Then, push down the memory module to secure. CAUTION: Before inserting a me mory module in the machine, make […]
-
Страница 409
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-5 Character Entry Method In character entry screens, use the procedur e below to enter characters. Keys Used Use the following keys to enter ch aracters. 1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s). 2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the characte r at the cursor p osition. If the cursor is at the end of[…]
-
Страница 410
Appendix-6 OPERATION GUIDE Selecting T ype of Characters To enter characters, the following three types are available: ABC To enter alphabets. 123 To enter numerals. Symbols To enter symbols. In a characte r entry sc reen, press [T ex t] (the Right Select key) to select the type of charac ters you want to enter . Each time you press [T ext] (the Ri[…]
-
Страница 411
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-7 Entering Characters After selectin g a character type, use t h e procedure below to en ter characters. Entering Alphabet s and Numerals Referring to the table below, press the key corre sponding to the cha racter you want to enter un til it is displayed. Key Entry mode Available characte rs Alphabetic/Symbol . @ — _ / : ?[…]
-
Страница 412
Appendix-8 OPERATION GUIDE Characters as sociated with diffe rent keys can be entere d consecutively. To enter a characte r associated with the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it. If you use c ursor keys t o move the cu rsor to an entry position apart from the end of th e line an[…]
-
Страница 413
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-9 Paper This section explains the pape r sizes an d types that can be used in the paper source. Cassette Optional p aper feeder Multi Purpose tray (MP tray) Supported types Supported p aper sizes No. of sheet s Plain, Preprinted, Bond , Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Colo r (Colour), Prepunched, High Qu ality , Custom 1 to 8 […]
-
Страница 414
Appendix-10 OPERATION GUIDE Envelopes ISO B5, Envelo pe #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Env elope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hag aki, Y oukei 4, Y oukei 2 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50″ o r 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.0 2″ or 148 to 356 mm 1 T ransparency (OHP film) Letter , A4 1 Supported types Supported […]
-
Страница 415
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-11 Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to prin t on standard copy paper as used in regu lar (‘dry’) copiers and pag e printers such as laser printer s. It also supports a vari ety of other types of paper that con form to the spe cifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper . P[…]
-
Страница 416
Appendix-12 OPERATION GUIDE Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for cho osing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent co rners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not u se paper that has a rough surfa ce or paper fiber lint, or that is especi ally delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only de[…]
-
Страница 417
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-13 Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be un coated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is th e weight in grams of one sh eet of paper one square meter in area[…]
-
Страница 418
Appendix-14 OPERATION GUIDE Curl: Most pap er naturally ten ds to curl af ter the packag e is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly . To deliver flat printouts, lo ad the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray. St atic electricity: During printing, paper is electrosta tically charged […]
-
Страница 419
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-15 When using these paper and media , choose that are design ed specifica lly for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purp ose tray for transpar encies, thick paper , envel opes, cardstocks, and label paper. Choosing Specia l Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirem ents ca[…]
-
Страница 420
Appendix-16 OPERATION GUIDE Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for en velopes. Due to the structure of envelopes, pr inting evenly over the e ntire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelope s in particu lar may be wrin kled by the ma chine in some cases as th ey pass throu gh. Before purchasing envelopes in v olu me, try testing a […]
-
Страница 421
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-17 Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. W hen using such pape r, do not peel these margins from the carrier shee t before completing output. Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Colored Paper Colored paper must confo rm to the specificatio ns listed on th e page 11 of the Appendix. […]
-
Страница 422
Appendix-18 OPERATION GUIDE S pecifications NOTE: S pecifications are subject to change without notice. Machine Item Description FS-1028MFP FS-1 128MFP Ty p e Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by se miconduc tor laser , single drum system Supported Original T ypes Shee t, Book, 3-dimensional object s (maximum original size : Folio/Legal) O[…]
-
Страница 423
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-19 Paper Cap acity Front Cassette 250 sheet s (80 g/m 2 ) Multi Purpose Tr a y 50 sheets (80 g/m 2 , plain paper , A4/Letter or less) Output T ray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be se t in one sheet increment s) Image Write System Semiconductor laser (1 beam) Main Memory S tandard: 2[…]
-
Страница 424
Appendix-20 OPERATION GUIDE Printer Power Consump- tion During printing 479.9 W (U .S.A./Canada), 470 W (European countr ies) 498 W (U.S.A./Canada), 484 W (European countrie s) During sta ndby 83.8 W (U.S.A./Canada) , 83.4 W (European countr ies) 91.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W (European countrie s) Low power mode 82.6 W (U.S.A./Canada), 82.3 W (Europ[…]
-
Страница 425
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-21 Scanner * 1 Available Operating System : Windows 2 000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP , Windows Vista * 2 Available Operating System : Windows Vista Item Description Operating Sy stem Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP , Windows Vist a, Windows Server 2003, Windows Se rver 2008 System requirement s IBM PC/A T compat[…]
-
Страница 426
Appendix-22 OPERATION GUIDE Document Processor (option) Environment al S pecifications NOTE: Consult your dealer or service re pr esentative for rec ommended paper t ypes. Item Description Original Feed Method Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4 Minimum: S tatement/A5 Paper Weight 50 to 120 g/m 2 Loa[…]
-
Страница 427
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-23 Glossary AppleT alk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer’s Mac OS, is a network protoc ol. AppleTalk e nables file/print er sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Ti meout During data tra nsmission, the machine ma y[…]
-
Страница 428
Appendix-24 OPERATION GUIDE EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner . Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than norma l. Emulation The function to interpret and execute other pr inters ‘ page description langua ges. The machine emulates operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (autom atic). FTP(File T ransfer Protocol) A protocol to […]
-
Страница 429
OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-25 POP3 (Post Of fice Protocol 3) A standard p rotocol to receive E-m ail from the se rver in which the mail is stored on th e Internet o r an intranet. PostScript A page description langu age developed by Adob e Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly- functional graphics, allowin g higher quality printing. […]
-
Страница 430
Appendix-26 OPERATION GUIDE TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IP v6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available addres s space, which re solves the proble m of the lack of a ddresses unde r IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such a s additional security function[…]
-
Страница 431
OPERATION GUIDE Index-1 Index Numerics 1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-7 A Accessibility Appendix-23 Adjusting Density 5-13 Auto 3-10 Manual 3-10 Adjustment/Maintenance 8-87 Copy Density Adjustment 8-87 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-89 Developer Refresh 8-90 Send/Box Density 8-88 AppleTalk Appendix-23 Setup 2-22 Auto Low Power Mode 3-4 Auto Paper Selec[…]
-
Страница 432
Index-2 OPERATION GUIDE File Format 8-36 File Name 8-39 Original Image 8-32 Original Orientation 8-30 Scan Resolution 8-33 Zoom 8-38 Default Gateway Appendix-23 Default Screen 8-5 Density Adjustment Copy 3-10 Send 5-13 Destination 8-112 Adding 8-112 Adding a Group 8-118 Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-30 Choosing from the Address Book 3-28 Editing 8-12[…]
-
Страница 433
OPERATION GUIDE Index-3 K KPDL Appendix-24 L Label Appendix-16 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Login 3-6, 11-5 Logout 3-6, 11-5 Low Power Mode 3-5 Low Power Timer 8-108 M Management 11-1 Job Accounting 11-13 User Login Administration 11-2 Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-24 Paper Size and Media 2-41, 8-15 Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types of Desti[…]
-
Страница 434
Index-4 OPERATION GUIDE Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-14 Specifications Appendix-11 Weight 8-17 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Paper Jam 10-11 Cassette 1 10-12 Cassette 2 10-12 Document Processor 10-16 Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-15 Jam Location Indicators 10-11 Multi Purpose Tray 10-15 Precaution 10-11 Paper Selection 4-4 Cassette 4-4 Multi Purpo[…]
-
Страница 435
OPERATION GUIDE Index-5 Printer 8-69 Send 8-62 Sleep 3-5 Slit Glass Cleaning 9-2 SMTP Appendix-25 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Specifications Document Processor Appendix-22 Environmental Specifications Appen- dix-22 Machine Appendix-18 Printer Appendix-20 Scanner Appendix-21 Specifying Destination 3-28 Status / Job Cancel 7-1 Status Page 8-81, Appendi[…]
-
Страница 436
Index-6 OPERATION GUIDE[…]
-
Страница 437
A1[…]
-
Страница 438
[…]
-
Страница 439
F irst Edition 2009. 7[…]
-
Page 1
OPERATION GUIDE FS-1100 FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP FS-1300D… -
Page 2
Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition. -
Page 3: Safety Conventions In This Guide
Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
-
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Caution / Warning Labels …………v Installation Precautions .
-
Page 5
Contents Job Finish Notice…………4-16 File Name Entry . -
Page 6
Contents Maintenance Cleaning …………..9-2 Toner Container . -
Page 7: Caution / Warning Labels
Caution / Warning Labels Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner. Laser inside the machine (Laser radiation warning) For U.S.A.
-
Page 8: Installation Precautions
Installation Precautions Environment CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the machine.
-
Page 9: Other Precautions
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant.
-
Page 10: Precautions For Use
Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside. Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine.
-
Page 11: Cleaning
If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
-
Page 12: Toner Container
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. If using the FS-1128MFP the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
-
Page 13
Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. -
Page 14: Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.
-
Page 15: Safety Instructions Regarding The Disconnection Of Power (Europe)
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß…
-
Page 16: Safety Of Laser Beam (Usa)
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance.
-
Page 17: Optical Unit
3. Optical unit When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit. 4. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 18: Safety Instructions Regarding The Disconnection Of Power (Usa)
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.
-
Page 19
(1) year, or 100,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. -
Page 20: Legal Restriction On Copying/Scanning
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning • It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. • Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned.
-
Page 21: Legal And Safety Information
Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. • Legal Information …………xx • Regarding Trade Names……….xxi • Energy Saving Control Function ……..xxv • Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ……. xxv •…
-
Page 22: Legal Information
Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 23: Regarding Trade Names
Regarding Trade Names • PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. • KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. • Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
-
Page 24
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access “http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available. Open SSLeay License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. -
Page 25: Original Ssleay License
Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;…
-
Page 26
Monotype Imaging License Agreement Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. -
Page 27: Energy Saving Control Function
Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.
-
Page 28: About This Operation Guide
About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters. Chapter 1 — Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 2 — Preparation before Use Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 3 — Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
-
Page 29: Conventions In This Guide
Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key. keys or a computer screen. [Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Select [System].
-
Page 30
xxviii OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 31: Part Names
1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys. • Operation Panel …………1-2 • Machine …………….1-4 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 32: Operation Panel
Used to call destinations registered to the one-touch key numbers (1 to 22). Shifts to switch the one-touch key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to 22). Lamp is lit while shifted (12 to 22). FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 33
Part Names Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when Clears entered numbers and characters. entering characters, change a value, etc. Resets settings and displays the Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered basic screen. value. Turns the machine on/off. Also used Displays the function menu for copy, to put it into or recover it from sleep mode. -
Page 34: Machine
Part Names Machine Original Cover (For FS-1028MFP only) Platen Original Size Indicator Plate Operation Panel Top Cover Front Cover Drum Unit Main Charger Cleaner Lock Lever Toner Container OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 35
Part Names Top Tray Paper Length Guide Paper Stopper Paper Width Guides Cassette Paper Width Guides (MP Tray) MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray MP Tray Extension OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 36
Part Names Anchor Pin USB Interface Connector Network Interface Connector Rear Cover Main Power Switch Power Cord Connector OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 37: Preparation Before Use
2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals. • Check bundled items …………2-2 • Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables..2-3 •…
-
Page 38: Check Bundled Items
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Documents KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide…
-
Page 39: Determining The Connection Method And Preparing Cables
Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP. TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 40: Preparing Necessary Cables
/Network FAX* 100Base-TX, Shielded) Printer/TWAIN USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable Scanning/WIA (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Scanning Max. 5.0 m, Shielded) Network FAX and FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 41: Connecting Cables
Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine. Turn the main power switch off (O). Connect the machine to the PC or your network device. When using the network interface, remove the cap.. Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
-
Page 42
Preparation before Use Turn the main power switch on (|). The machine begins to warm up. When connecting the network cable, configure the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-12. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 43: Switching The Language For Display [Language]
Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display. Use the procedure below to select the language. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
-
Page 44
Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 45: Setting Date And Time
Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message.
-
Page 46: Date Format
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [Date Setting]. A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID Login User Name: L b and password to log in. ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login Press the OK key. The Date Setting menu appears. Date Setting: Date/Time *********************…
-
Page 47: Time Zone
Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. Press the key to select [Date/Time]. Date Setting: Date/Time ********************* Date Format Time Zone [ Exit Press the OK key. Date/Time appears. Date/Time: Year Month 2009 (Time Zone:Tokyo Press the…
-
Page 48: Network Setup (Lan Cable Connection)
Preparation before Use Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms. This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures.
-
Page 49
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have Administrator only. logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. The default settings of the login user name and login password are both 2800. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. -
Page 50: Ipv6 Setting
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. Press the key to select [IPv4 Setting]. TCP/IP Settings: a b TCP/IP ********************* IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting [ Exit…
-
Page 51: Default Gateway
Preparation before Use Press the key to select [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Press the key to select [IP Address]. IPv4 Setting: DHCP Bonjour ********************* IP Address [ Exit Press the OK key.
-
Page 52: Subnet Mask
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears. Subnet Mask: 123.145.167.189 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Press the key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask.
-
Page 53
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is [On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) to Off. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. -
Page 54
Preparation before Use DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. -
Page 55
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. -
Page 56
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. DHCP appears. DHCP: 2 *On ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. -
Page 57
Preparation before Use In the System menu, press the key to select System: [Network Setting]. Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk… -
Page 58: Appletalk Setup
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears. IPv4 Setting: DHCP Bonjour ********************* IP Address [ Exit Press the key to select [Bonjour]. Press the OK key. Bonjour appears. Bonjour: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key.
-
Page 59
Preparation before Use In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [System], and then press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have Administrator only. logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. -
Page 60: Installing Software
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep Mode before continuing. See Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. 2-24…
-
Page 61: Command Center (Settings For E-Mail)
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct password to access pages other than the startup page. The default setting is admin00. The password can be changed. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 62: Sending E-Mail
Preparation before Use Sending E-mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following: •…
-
Page 63
Preparation before Use Enter the correct settings in each field. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. Item Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25. -
Page 64: Loading Paper
Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2). Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
-
Page 65: Loading Paper In The Cassettes
Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m The following paper sizes are supported: Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Executive, Statement, A4, B5, A5, A6, Folio, and 16K.
-
Page 66
Preparation before Use Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab on the left guide and slide the guides to the paper size required. NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette. -
Page 67
Preparation before Use Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded, curled, or damaged. IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide. •… -
Page 68: Loading Paper In The Multi Purpose Tray
Preparation before Use There is a paper gauge on the left side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the pointer will go down to the level of (empty). NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage…
-
Page 69
Preparation before Use Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. Pull out the subtray. Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. -
Page 70: Loading Envelopes
Preparation before Use Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper.
-
Page 71
Preparation before Use Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. Pull out the subtray. Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. -
Page 72
Preparation before Use Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. For landscape form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing towards you. -
Page 73
Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face. NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying… -
Page 74: Specifying Paper Size And Media
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
-
Page 75
Preparation before Use In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User Property Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. -
Page 76
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears. Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* Legala Statementa Press the key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. -
Page 77
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. -
Page 78: User Property
Preparation before Use When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************** Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login Password: NOTE: [ Menu ] [ Login •…
-
Page 79
Preparation before Use Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears. MP Tray Size: 1 *Lettera ********************* Legala Statementa Press the key to select the desired paper Others: size and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5a ********************* If you select [Others], select one of the other Envelope #10 options and then press the OK key. -
Page 80: Loading Originals
Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing. Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals. Open the original cover. NOTE: If the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed, open the document processor.
-
Page 81: Loading Originals In The Document Processor
Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Part Names of the Document Processor (1) Top cover (2) Original width guides (3) Original table (4) Original eject table (5) Original stopper…
-
Page 82
Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals. Place the originals. -
Page 83
3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations. • Power On/Off …………..3-2 • Auto Low Power Mode……….3-4 • Sleep and Auto Sleep ………..3-5 • Login/Logout …………..3-6 • One-Touch Keys and Program Keys……3-7 • Message Display…………3-8 • Copying……………..3-9 • Printing — Printing from Applications……3-18 •… -
Page 84: Basic Operation
Basic Operation Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit… Press the Power key. When the main power indicator is off… Turn the main power switch on. IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
-
Page 85: Power Off
If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
-
Page 86: Auto Low Power Mode
Basic Operation Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for 2 minutes. OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 87: Sleep And Auto Sleep
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit. If you are using the FS-1128MFP, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be ready to operate in about 15 seconds.
-
Page 88: Login/Logout
Basic Operation Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine. NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
-
Page 89: One-Touch Keys And Program Keys
Basic Operation One-Touch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below. One-Touch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-124.
-
Page 90: Message Display
Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display. Ready to copy. Ready to send. Copies: Dest.: p :sally@kyoceramitaN 100% 1-sided Zoom [ Duplex ] [ Copier Screen Send Screen Reference Meaning number Indicates the current status of the machine.
-
Page 91: Copying
Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor.
-
Page 92: Adjusting Density
Basic Operation Press the Start key to start copying. Remove the finished copies from the top tray. Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.
-
Page 93: Selecting Image Quality
Basic Operation Press the OK key. Manual: When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press u Lighter -3 ********************* key to select your desired density and v Lighter -2 then press the OK key. w Lighter -1 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
-
Page 94: Zoom Copying
Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available. Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image Ledger: 129 % suitably to the selected paper size. Letter-R A3: 141 % Statement-R: 64 % A5: 70 % Zoom Entry…
-
Page 95
Basic Operation Model Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Metric Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), Models 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), (Asia 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.) Pacific) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >>… -
Page 96: Duplex Copying
Basic Operation Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Press the Start key. Copying begins. Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are available.
-
Page 97
Basic Operation Two-sided to Two-sided Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional document processor is required. NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, A4, Original Copy B5, A5 and Folio. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below. Press the Function Menu key. -
Page 98
Basic Operation If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the Orig. Binding: Right Select key) and you can select the binding 1 *o Left/Right ********************* edge of the original and the original setting orientation. p Top After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge Orig.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies, and the original 1 *c Top Edge Top… -
Page 99: Collate Copying
Basic Operation If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the Set original Right Select key). Copying begins. and press Start key. Job No.: 9999 Page(s): [ Cancel ] [End Scan] Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies. You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
-
Page 100: Printing — Printing From Applications
Basic Operation Printing — Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Library). Create a document using an application. Click File and select Print in the application.
-
Page 101
Basic Operation Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type. Click Source and select the paper source. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded… -
Page 102: Sending
Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
-
Page 103: Send As E-Mail
Basic Operation Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. NOTE: • You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN.
-
Page 104
Basic Operation If there are additional destinations, press the Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations. Press the key to select a destination and Dest. -
Page 105
Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder. • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. •… -
Page 106
Basic Operation Enter the path name. Consider, that the share name Path: but not the foldername on the destination pc has SD3report* to be typed in. [ Text Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. Enter the login user name. You have to enter the Login User Name: account name of the destination pc. -
Page 107
Basic Operation For send to folder (SMB) Max. Item Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to Up to 64 (SMB)* receive the data. characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as Up to 128 follows. -
Page 108
Basic Operation If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 3 reappears. -
Page 109: Confirm Destination Screen
Basic Operation Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], Check through the all destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed. Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen. Press the key to check all destinations.
-
Page 110: Specifying Destination
Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys. Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. In the basic screen for sending, press the Address Select Addr Book: a b Book key.
-
Page 111
Basic Operation Search in Address Book In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select Menu: key). Menu appears. Select ********************* Detail Search(Name) Press the key to select [Search(Name)] Address Book: and then press the OK key. A search screen Design ********************* appears. -
Page 112
Basic Operation Enter the characters you want to search. Search(Name): If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and then the OK key, Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. Select the desired item for each and then press the OK Menu Text key. -
Page 113: Canceling Jobs
Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. During a printing or sending job, press the Stop Job Cancel List: key.
-
Page 114: Checking Remaining Toner And Paper
Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette. Checking Remaining Toner Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause ]…
-
Page 115: Program (Copying And Sending)
Basic Operation Program (Copying and Sending) Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys. Registering Settings After making settings, press and hold the one of the Registered.
-
Page 116
Basic Operation 3-34 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 117
4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying. • Original Size………………4-2 • Paper Selection………………4-4 • Original Orientation …………….4-8 • EcoPrint ………………… 4-10 • Combine Mode………………. 4-11 • Continuous Scan…………….4-15 • Job Finish Notice …………….4-16 •… -
Page 118: Copying Functions
Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process. The following options are available. Item How to Select Sizes Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Sizes standard sizes.
-
Page 119
Copying Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5q ********************* Envelope #10 Envelope #9 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Press the Start key to start copying. -
Page 120: Paper Selection
Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size. NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8). Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette. Press the Copy key.
-
Page 121
Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. How to Category Item Sizes Select Paper Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Size Sizes the standard… -
Page 122
Copying Functions Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears. Paper Selection g ********************* Collate Duplex [ Exit Press the key to select [Paper Selection]. Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears. Paper Selection: a b Auto ********************* A A4a Plain B A5a… -
Page 123
Copying Functions If Add paper in MP tray. is displayed during the copying process, add paper in the multi purpose tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then resumes. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 124: Original Orientation
Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions. • Duplex • Combine mode When placing originals on the platen [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] When placing originals on the optional document processor [Top Edge Left] [Top Edge Top] NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30.
-
Page 125
Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears. Paper Selection g ********************* Collate Duplex… -
Page 126: Ecoprint
Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen.
-
Page 127: Combine Mode
Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated. NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement and 16K.
-
Page 128
Copying Functions 4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE:… -
Page 129
Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available. None Solid Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. -
Page 130
Copying Functions Press the key to select the desired border Border Line: line type and then press the OK key. None ********************* l Solid Line m Dotted Line Press the key to select the orientation of Orig.Orientation: a b the original and then press the OK key. c Top Edge Top Completed. -
Page 131: Continuous Scan
Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
-
Page 132: Job Finish Notice
Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish. NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
-
Page 133
Copying Functions Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears. JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Press the key to select [Address Book] or Destination: [Address Entry], and then press the OK key. 1 *Address Book ********************* Address Entry… -
Page 134: File Name Entry
Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
-
Page 135: Print Override
Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job. NOTE: If the machine is left for 60 seconds in the interruption copy mode, the interrupt copy job is automatically canceled and the print job resumed.
-
Page 136
Copying Functions 4-20 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 137
5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. • Original Size…………..5-2 • Sending Size…………..5-4 • Zoom…………….5-6 • Duplex Sending………….5-7 • Original Orientation …………5-8 • File Format…………..5-10 • Original Image………….5-12 • Adjusting Density …………5-13 • Scan Resolution…………5-14 •… -
Page 138: Sending Functions
Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process. Choose the original size from the following groups of original size. Item Detail Size…
-
Page 139
Sending Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5q ********************* Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Envelope #10 the basic screen for sending. Envelope #9 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. -
Page 140: Sending Size
Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). The table below lists the sizes. Item Detail Size Standard Select from Same Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter, Sizes as Original Size or Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, Standard Size.
-
Page 141
Sending Functions Press the key to select [Sending Size]. Press the OK key. Sending Size appears. Sending Size: 1 *Same as OrigSize ********************* Letter Legal Press the key to select the desired sending size. If you select [Others], select one of the other Others: options. -
Page 142: Zoom
Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size. The table below lists the available options. Item Detail 100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size) Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
-
Page 143: Duplex Sending
Sending Functions Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original. The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. Original Type Binding Binding 1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided — — 2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right, Top Edge Top, Binding Top…
-
Page 144: Original Orientation
Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. • 1-sided / 2-sided Selection When placing the original on the platen [Top Edge Top]…
-
Page 145
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. Orig.Orientation: a b c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* Press the key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. -
Page 146: File Format
Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send. The table below lists the file formats and their details. Adjustable range of image File Format Color mode quality 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale, Black 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) and White TIFF…
-
Page 147
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE 5-11… -
Page 148: Original Image
Sending Functions Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Item Detail Text+Photo Text and photos together. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Text Only text, no photos. Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals. Press the Send key.
-
Page 149: Adjusting Density
Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. The table below shows the available settings. Item Detail Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original. The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.
-
Page 150: Scan Resolution
Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
-
Page 151: Color / Grayscale / Black And White Selection
Sending Functions Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images. Press the Send key.
-
Page 152: Continuous Scan
Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
-
Page 153: File Name Entry
Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending. Press the Send key.
-
Page 154: Subject And Body Entry
Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the Send key.
-
Page 155: Wsd Scan
Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer. To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-132) must be set to [On] in the network settings. Procedure using computer Install the WIA driver on your computer in the custom mode from the supplied CD-ROM (Product…
-
Page 156
Sending Functions Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears. WSD Scan: From Computer From Oper. Panel ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [From Oper. Panel]. Select the destination computer from the computer Select Computer: a b list. P Computer01 ********************* Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the P Computer02… -
Page 157: Job Finish Notice
Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: appears.
-
Page 158
Sending Functions Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address. 5-22 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 159: Ftp Encrypted Tx
Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE 5-23…
-
Page 160: Sanning Image Using Application
Sanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable and installthe Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide.
-
Page 161: Document Box
6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box. • Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory ….6-2 • Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ..6-4 • Removing USB Memory ……….6-6 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 162: Printing Documents Stored In Usb Memory
Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer. Limitations • The following file types can be printed: •…
-
Page 163
Document Box Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed. Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected USB Memory: file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it. -
Page 164: Storing Documents
Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format. NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100. Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
-
Page 165
Document Box IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory, ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-6. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 166: Removing Usb Memory
Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. Press the Document Box key. The Document Box Document Box: menu appears. USB Memory ********************* Press the key to select [USB Memory].
-
Page 167
7 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication. -
Page 168: Status / Job Cancel
Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens — Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job.
-
Page 169
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key to check detailed information of 0009 Detail: the selected job. Status: Processing NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the key to switch the display to other information items. -
Page 170
Status / Job Cancel Item / Key Detail Status Status of job Printing Print Waiting no icon: Pausing print job or error Preferential print job is running Suspended because preferential print job is running Send Job Status screen Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. -
Page 171
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. -
Page 172
Status / Job Cancel Store Job Status screen Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause Press the key to select [Store Job Status]. Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press Store Job Status: a b key to check the store queue. -
Page 173
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. -
Page 174: Checking Job History
Status / Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs. NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer. Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens — Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job. The following job histories are available.
-
Page 175
Status / Job Cancel A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7-2. -
Page 176
Status / Job Cancel Displaying Send Job Log Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause Press the key to select [Send Job Log]. Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press Send Job Log: key to check the send log. -
Page 177
Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. -
Page 178
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) 0009 Detail: to check the detailed information of the selected Result: job. Error 10200 Press the key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time… -
Page 179: Sending The Job Log History
Status / Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached. Displaying Job Log History Menu Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main Sys.
-
Page 180
Status / Job Cancel Press the key to select [Job Log History]. Report: Admin Rpt Set. Result Rpt Set. ********************* Job Log History [ Exit Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu Job Log History: appears. Auto Sending ********************* Send History Destination… -
Page 181: Registering Destination
Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears. Dest. Confirm.: p Morgan@kyoceramita *********************N NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. [ Exit Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears.
-
Page 182
Status / Job Cancel NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has Register: been changed after you selected the destination from Address Book ********************* the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on 2 *Address Entry page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address. -
Page 183
Status / Job Cancel Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs Jobs: appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time. (1 — 16) ******16*jobs Press the OK key. -
Page 184
Status / Job Cancel In the Job Log History menu, press the Job Log History: to select [Subject]. Send History Destination ********************* Subject [ Exit Press the OK key. Subject appears. Subject: %printer* NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- 5 for details on entering characters. -
Page 185: Pause And Resumption Of Jobs
Status / Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below. Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Print Job Status ********************* Send Job Status Store Job Status [ Pause…
-
Page 186: Device/Communication
Status / Job Cancel Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status. Check of Device Status Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: menu appears. Store Job Log Scanner *********************…
-
Page 187
Status / Job Cancel The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed. If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log Log: menu appears. From this screen, you can check or ********************* Outgoing FAX Log print the transmission/reception history. Incoming FAX Log Outgoing FAX Rpt NOTE: If you are using a user management function,… -
Page 188
Status / Job Cancel 7-22 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 189: Default Setting (System Menu)
8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. • Common Settings …………8-2 • Copy Settings…………..8-56 • Sending Settings…………8-62 • Document Box Settings ……….8-66 • Printer Settings …………8-69 •…
-
Page 190: Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings Common settings include; • How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2 • Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2 • Default Screen …8-5 • Sound …8-6 • Display Bright. …8-7 • Original/Paper Settings …8-8 •…
-
Page 191
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. -
Page 192
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional language Message display Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese If you are using one of the optional languages, it is displayed in place of Portugues. Press the key to select a language. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. -
Page 193
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Item Description Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. -
Page 194: Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting. Item Value Description Off, On * Emit a sound when the Confirmation control panel are pressed.
-
Page 195: Display Bright
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears. Key Confirmation: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu. Display Bright.
-
Page 196
Default Setting (System Menu) Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Dimensions Inch models… -
Page 197
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears. Size Entry(X): (1.97 — 14.02) J **11.23*» Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X). Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 198
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size to be used as the default value. Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value. In the Sys. -
Page 199
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Dimensions Inch models… -
Page 200
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. Custom Orig.Size ********************* Def. Orig. Size Custom PaperSize [ Exit Press the key to select [Custom PaperSize]. -
Page 201
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3). The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Description Paper Size… -
Page 202
Default Setting (System Menu) Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3]) The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears. Cassette 1 Set.: Cassette 1 Size ********************* Cassette 1 Type… -
Page 203
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Description Paper… -
Page 204
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. -
Page 205
Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [Size Entry], you can register a custom Size Entry(Y): size. In the screen that appears, set the vertical size (Y) and horizontal size (X) of the paper using (5.83 — 14.02) the numeric keys. x ***11.49*»… -
Page 206
Default Setting (System Menu) Extra Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Heavy Cardstock × × × × Color × × × × Prepunched × × × × Letterhead × × × ×… -
Page 207
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. Custom Orig.Size ********************* Def. Orig. Size Custom PaperSize [ Exit Press the key to select [Media Type Set.]. Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears. Media type Set.: Plain *********************… -
Page 208
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Print Density menu Print Density: appears. Medium Dark 3 *Normal ********************* Medium Light Press the key to select the print density. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the Plain: screen returns to the menu for the selected paper Paper Weight type. -
Page 209
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed. Name Entry: Enter the name of the custom paper type. Osaka SD Kyocer*S NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix- [ Text 5 for details on entering characters. Press the OK key. -
Page 210
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional side feeder installed. Use the procedure below to select the default paper source. In the Sys. -
Page 211
Default Setting (System Menu) Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. -
Page 212
Default Setting (System Menu) Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. -
Page 213
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. -
Page 214: Preset Limit
Default Setting (System Menu) Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys.
-
Page 215
Default Setting (System Menu) Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to change the input units. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************… -
Page 216: Error Handling
Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. Item Description 1-sided…
-
Page 217
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu Error Handling: appears. DuplexPaperError ********************* PaperMismatchErr [ Exit Press the key to select [DuplexPagerError]. Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears. DuplexPaperError: a b 1 *1-sided ********************* Display Error Press the key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled. -
Page 218: Function Defaults
Default Setting (System Menu) Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Orig.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.
-
Page 219
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. Orig.Orientation: a b c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* Press the key to select [c Top Edge Top] or [d Top Edge Left] . Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. -
Page 220
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Continuous Scan]. Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears. Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. -
Page 221
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Original Image]. Press the OK key. Original Image appears. Original Image: 1 *Text+Photo *********************… -
Page 222
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Scan Resolution]. Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears. Scan Resolution: a b 1 *200x100dpi Norm. -
Page 223
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 224
Default Setting (System Menu) File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below. File Format Description Send files in PDF format. TIFF Send files in TIFF format. Send files in XPS format. JPEG Send files in JPEG format. -
Page 225
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. File Format appears. File Format: 1 *PDF ********************* TIFF Press the key to select [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Density Set the default density. -
Page 226
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Density appears. Density: Auto ********************* 2 *Manual Press the key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. -
Page 227
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Zoom appears. Zoom: 1 *100% ********************* Auto Press the key to select [100%] or [Auto]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. -
Page 228
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [File Name Entry]. Press the OK key. -
Page 229
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 230
Default Setting (System Menu) Collate Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Collate Collate not performed. Collate performed. NOTE: Refer to page 3-17 for Collate/Offset. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings. In the Sys. -
Page 231
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description No EcoPrint performed. EcoPrint performed. NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint. -
Page 232
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. EcoPrint: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. -
Page 233
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. 2 in 1 layout ********************* 4 in 1 Layout Border Line [ Exit Press the key to select [2 in 1 Layout]. Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears. 2 in 1 Layout 1 *g L to R f… -
Page 234
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 235
Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description None No border line. l Solid Line Draws solid border lines. m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines. -
Page 236
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Border Line appears. Border Line: None ********************* Solid Line Dotted Line Press the key to select [ None], [l Solid Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. -
Page 237
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Detail Setting]. Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. -
Page 238
Default Setting (System Menu) Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2- sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding p Top Top binding… -
Page 239
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears. Finish.. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* Press the key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p Top]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. -
Page 240
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. 2 in 1 layout ********************* 4 in 1 Layout Border Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Image Quality]. Press the OK key. Image Quality appears. Image Quality: 1 *1 Low(High Comp) *********************… -
Page 241
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Color Selection ********************* Scan Resolution FAX Resolution [ Exit Press the key to select [Detail Setting]. Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: appears. -
Page 242
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Function Default]. Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. -
Page 243: Login Operation
Default Setting (System Menu) Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. Item Description Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters. Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears.
-
Page 244: Copy Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions. • Photo Processing …8-56 • Paper Selection …8-57 • Auto Paper Selection …8-58 • Auto % Priority …8-58 • Select Key Set …8-60 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 245
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Dithering(Normal)] or [Dithering(Rough)]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Auto… -
Page 246: Auto Paper Selection
Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
-
Page 247
Default Setting (System Menu) The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off. Item Detail No zoom performed (copied in original size). Automatic zoom performed as appropriate. Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority. In the Sys. -
Page 248
Default Setting (System Menu) Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. •… -
Page 249
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. Select Key Set.: a b Left ********************* Right [ Exit Press the key to select [Left] or [Right]. Press the OK key. This displays the function Left: selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. -
Page 250: Sending Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. • Select Key Set …8-62 • DestinationCheck …8-64 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 251
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send]. Copy Printer Send ********************* [ Exit Press the OK key. The Send menu appears. Send: Select Key Set. -
Page 252
Default Setting (System Menu) DestinationCheck Set whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. The setting items are as follows: Item Description Dest. Confirm. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. Check New Dest. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen for a new destination. -
Page 253
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-65… -
Page 254: Document Box Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box. • Select Key Set …8-66 Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box.
-
Page 255
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box]. Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination Adjust/Maint. [ Exit Press the OK key. The Document Box menu Document Box: appears. -
Page 256
Default Setting (System Menu) IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed. 8-68 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 257: Printer Settings
Default Setting (System Menu) Printer Settings Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. • Emulation Set …8-69 • EcoPrint …8-72 • Override A4/LTR …8-73 •…
-
Page 258
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the emulation. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 259
Default Setting (System Menu) When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. In Emulation Set, press the key to select Emulation Set.: [KPDL]. -
Page 260
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Alt. Emulation appears. Alt. Emulation: DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ-850 5 *PCL6 ********************* Press the key to select the printer for alternative emulation. Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears. KPDL Error Rpt: 1 *Off ********************* Press the… -
Page 261
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. EcoPrint: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings. -
Page 262
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears. Override A4/LTR: a b ********************* 2 *On Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode. -
Page 263
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Duplex appears. Duplex: 1 *Off ********************* Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Press the key to select [Off], [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Short Edge]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. -
Page 264
Default Setting (System Menu) Orientation Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape. Portrait Landscape Printer Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer *********************… -
Page 265: Formfeed Timeout
Default Setting (System Menu) FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper.
-
Page 266: Cr Action
Default Setting (System Menu) Item Description Ignore LF No line feed performed. Use the procedure below to specify a LF action. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key.
-
Page 267
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify a CR action. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 268
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer]. Copy Printer ********************* Send [ Exit Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Printer: Emulation Set. -
Page 269: Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Default Setting (System Menu) Printing Reports/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges. Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows.
-
Page 270
Default Setting (System Menu) Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine. Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Report]. Report ********************* Counter… -
Page 271: Status Page
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Print. The screen shown is the one when Status Page is Are you sure? selected. z Status Page Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu.
-
Page 272: Network Status
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint.: appears. Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* Send/Box Density Correct. Bk Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Service Setting]. Press the OK key. Service Setting appears. Service Setting: a b Service Status ********************* Network Status…
-
Page 273
Default Setting (System Menu) Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Error Only. Item Description No result report printed. Result report automatically printed. Transmitted images can also be attached. -
Page 274
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Send Result]. The Send Result: Send Result menu appears. E-mail/Folder ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [E-mail/Folder]. E- E-mail/Folder: mail/Folder appears. 3 *Error Only ********************* Press the key to select [Off], [On] or [Error Only]. -
Page 275: Adjustment/Maintenance
Default Setting (System Menu) Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. • Copy Denst. Adj. …8-87 • Send/Box Density …8-88 • Correct. Bk Line …8-89 • New Developer…8-90 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 276
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. This displays the density Manual: selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is selected. 0 Normal ********************* Press the key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. -
Page 277
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used. -
Page 278
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint.: appears. Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* Send/Box Density Correct. Bk Line [ Exit Press the key to select [Correct. Bk Line]. Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears. Correct. -
Page 279
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [New Developer]. Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. New Developer. Are you sure? Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/ Maint. -
Page 280: Date/Timer
Default Setting (System Menu) Date/Timer Date/Timer settings include: • Date/Time …8-92 • Date Format …8-95 • Time Zone …8-97 • Summer Time …8-99 • Auto Error Clear …8-101 • Auto Sleep …8-103 • Auto Panel Reset …8-106 • Low Power Timer …8-108 •…
-
Page 281
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login The Date Settings menu appears. -
Page 282
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-151) is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time, press [Yes](the Left Select key). -
Page 283
Default Setting (System Menu) Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. -
Page 284
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. 8-96 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 285
Default Setting (System Menu) Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time difference. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************… -
Page 286
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear. 8-98 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 287: Summer Time
Default Setting (System Menu) Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. Use the procedure below to set Summer Time. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property *********************…
-
Page 288
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. 8-100 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 289: Auto Error Clear
Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared.
-
Page 290
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login… -
Page 291: Auto Sleep
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
-
Page 292
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary. Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. User/Job Account User Property Common Settings… -
Page 293
Default Setting (System Menu) Sleep Timer If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 15 minutes. In the Sys. -
Page 294: Auto Panel Reset
Default Setting (System Menu) in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings.
-
Page 295
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Auto Panel Reset]. Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears. Auto Panel Reset: a b 2 *On ********************* Press the key to select [Off] or [On]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. -
Page 296: Low Power Timer
Default Setting (System Menu) The Timer Settings menu appears. Timer Setting: Err. Clear Timer ********************* Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer [ Exit Press the key to select [Panel Reset Timer]. Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears. PanelReset Timer:D b (5 — 495) ******90*sec.
-
Page 297: Unusable Time
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login…
-
Page 298
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Language ********************* Default Screen Sound [ Exit Press the key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. -
Page 299
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. End Time appears. End Time: Hour Min. ***07*: (Current Time 11:45) Press the key or numeric keys to set the End Time. Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears. Unlock Code: (0000 — 0000) ********99*** Press the key or numeric keys to set the… -
Page 300: Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)
Default Setting (System Menu) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional). Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered.
-
Page 301
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Add Address]. Press the OK key. Add Address appears. Add Address: Contact ********************* Group Press the key to select [Contact]. Press the OK key. This displays the screen for Detail: editing destinations. Contact Name Sally NOTE:… -
Page 302
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering E-mail Address Press the key to display E-mail Address. Detail: p E-mail Address: 4/7 t_maury@kyoceramita.N [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry Address Entry: screen appears. [ Text Enter the e-mail address. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. -
Page 303
Default Setting (System Menu) Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item Description Max. No. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E.g. -
Page 304
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Path appears. Path: SD3report* [ Text Enter the path name. Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. Login User Name: A b Maury* [ Text Enter the login user name. Press the OK key. Login Password appears. Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO* [ Text… -
Page 305
Default Setting (System Menu) Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a Dest. Confirm.: connection with the entered destination. p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000********* b 0667741234 [ Exit If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). -
Page 306: Adding A Group
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
-
Page 307
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Add Address appears. Add Address: Contact 2 *Group ********************* Press the key to select [Group]. Press the OK key. This displays the screen for Detail: editing groups. Group Name: GUI Section NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already been registered, the screen will display Registered [ Edit… -
Page 308
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering Group Member Press the key to display Group Member. Detail: Group Member: [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays Group Member: the list of destinations registered to the group. p Sally ********************* b Morgan G Morgan [ Menu… -
Page 309
Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group, the screen will display This address is already registered. and return to the screen of step 7. Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below. -
Page 310: Print List
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to display Address Number. Detail: Address Number: [ Edit Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry Address Number: screen appears. (001 — 120) *****053* Press the key or the numeric keys to enter the address number.
-
Page 311
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: appears. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu Press the key to select the destination you want to edit. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu Menu: appears. -
Page 312
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them. The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below: No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15 No.5… -
Page 313
Default Setting (System Menu) Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key. Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key. In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where Select Key No.: you want to edit the destination and hold it (2 No. -
Page 314
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Overwrite. Are you sure? z No. 1 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key, overwriting the previous one. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. -
Page 315: Restarting The System
Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the System Restart the printer without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system. In the Sys.
-
Page 316: Network Setup
Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setup The following network settings are available. • LAN Interface Setup …8-128 • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-129 • TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-129 • NetWare Setup …8-130 • AppleTalk Setup …8-132 • Protocol Detail …8-135 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
-
Page 317
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears. LAN Interface: 1 *Auto ********************* 10Base-Half 10Base-Full Press the key to select the desired LAN interface. The available LAN interfaces are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. -
Page 318
Default Setting (System Menu) The System menu appears. System: Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk… -
Page 319
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). -
Page 320
Default Setting (System Menu) Ether-II 802.2 SNAP Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-127. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. -
Page 321
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [WSD-SCAN]. Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu appears. WSD-SCAN: 1 *Off ********************* Press the key to select [On] or [Off]. -
Page 322
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. TCP/IP Settings ********************* NetWare AppleTalk [ Exit Press the key to select [WSD-PRINT]. Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu WSD-PRINT: appears. -
Page 323
Default Setting (System Menu) Protocol Detail Make other network related settings. Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* NetBEUI Selects whether or not to × receive documents using NetBEUI. Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol. -
Page 324
Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* Select whether or not to use IPP, and the number of the Port number: 631 port to be used. IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-138. -
Page 325
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Protocol Detail ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [Protocol Detail]. Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu Protocol Detail: a b appears. -
Page 326: Network Security
Default Setting (System Menu) Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. The following network security settings are available. • SSL Setting …8-138 • SNMPv3 Setting …8-143 • IPSec Setting …8-144 SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL network security for communication.
-
Page 327
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. Secure Protocol ********************* Host Name LAN Interface [ Exit Press the key to select [Secure Protocol]. Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. Secure Protocol: a b ********************* IPP Security… -
Page 328: Http Security
Default Setting (System Menu) The System menu appears. System: Network Setting ********************* I/F Block Set. Security Level [ Exit Press the key to select [Network Setting]. Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. Secure Protocol ********************* Host Name LAN Interface…
-
Page 329
Default Setting (System Menu) In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key. Report Counter System ********************* [ Exit When you are performing user management and Login User Name: have not logged in, a login screen will appear. ******************* Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). -
Page 330
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or [HTTPS only]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. LDAP Security Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. -
Page 331
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. Secure Protocol: a b IPP Security HTTP Security LDAP Security ********************* [ Exit Press the key to select [LDAP Security]. Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears. LDAP Security: 1 *Off ********************* LDAPv3/TLS… -
Page 332
Default Setting (System Menu) IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 333
Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule Rule Setting: Setting appears. Press the key to select 1 *Off ********************* [On] or [Off]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-145… -
Page 334: Interface Block Setting
Default Setting (System Menu) Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. The following interface block settings are available: • USB Host (USB memory slot setting) •…
-
Page 335: Security Level
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. USB Host appears. USB Host: 1 *Unblock ********************* Block Press the key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu. USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device).
-
Page 336
Default Setting (System Menu) Press the OK key. USB Device appears. USB Device: 1 *Unblock ********************* Block Press the key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu. 8-148 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 337
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 338: Security Level (Security Level Setting)
Default Setting (System Menu) Security Level (Security Level setting) The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu. 8-150 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 339: Optional Functions
Default Setting (System Menu) Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Op Functions Although nothing is currently displayed, when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed, the licenses can be set using this menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-151…
-
Page 340
Default Setting (System Menu) 8-152 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 341: Maintenance
9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement. • Cleaning…………….9-2 • Toner Container …………9-5 OPERATION GUIDE…
-
Page 342: Cleaning
Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality. CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
-
Page 343
Maintenance Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands. NOTE: The drum unit is sensitive to light. Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes. -
Page 344
Maintenance On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner (green) back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire, then return it to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION ). IMPORTANT: Remove the fixing tape on the main charger cleaner before cleaning for the first time. -
Page 345: Toner Container
Maintenance Toner Container When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner. Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality. CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
-
Page 346
Maintenance Remove the label from the toner container. Install the new toner container in the machine. Push firmly on the top of the container at the positions marked PUSH, until you hear a click. Turn the lock lever to the lock position. Close the front cover. -
Page 347
Maintenance Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet. We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time. -
Page 348
Maintenance OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 349: 10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine. • Solving Malfunctions ………..10-2 • Responding to Error Messages ……..10-5 • Clearing Paper Jams ……….10-11 OPERATION GUIDE 10-1…
-
Page 350: Solving Malfunctions
Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions…
-
Page 351
Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Copies have a moire Is the original a printed Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-12 pattern (dots grouped photograph? together in patterns and not aligned uniformly). Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. -
Page 352
PC set application software settings are properly? set properly. While the operation Is the operation panel Check the panel lock setting in KYOCERA panel was being used, locked? COMMAND CENTER and change COMMAND the keys locked up the setting if necessary. -
Page 353: Responding To Error Messages
Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. Alphanumeric Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Load paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper. 2-29 of paper? Load paper in MP Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose…
-
Page 354
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Incorrect Login User – Enter correct login user name or — Name or Password. password. Job Is canceled. Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing The printing count exceeded the — restriction exceeded. count restricted by Job acceptable count restricted by Job Job is canceled. -
Page 355
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Scanner memory – Scanning cannot be performed due — is full. to insufficient memory of scanner. Job is canceled. The job is canceled. Press the OK key. Is the acceptable scanning Press the OK key to print, send or —… -
Page 356
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Send error. – 1105: E-mail — The SMTP protocol #### setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMTP protocol setting. Scan to PC (SMB) — SMB setting is turned off. -
Page 357
Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page The phone receiver is – Put down the receiver. — off the hook. Hang Up. File is not found. – The specified file is not found. The — Job is canceled. job is canceled. Press the OK key. Top tray is full of –… -
Page 358
Troubleshooting Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes If an error lamp flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1.5 seconds, check the following. -
Page 359: Clearing Paper Jams
Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below. Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs, the error message displays the location of the jam.
-
Page 360
Troubleshooting Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray. Reload the MP tray. Open and close the top cover to clear the error and the machine warms up and resumes printing. Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in paper cassette or paper feeder. Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder. -
Page 361
Troubleshooting Open the duplexer’s cover in front of the machine and remove any jammed paper. Open the duplexer’s cover at the rear of the machine and remove any jammed paper. Push the cassette back in securely, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing. -
Page 362: Inside The Machine
Troubleshooting Inside the Machine Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine. Remove any partially fed paper. Open the front cover, and lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands.
-
Page 363: Rear Cover
Troubleshooting If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it along the normal running direction of the paper. Return the drum unit to its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine. Insert the developer unit together with the toner container, back into the machine.
-
Page 364: Optional Document Processor
Troubleshooting If the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit, open the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it out. Close the rear cover, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing.
-
Page 365
Troubleshooting Open the document processor. Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine. Close the document processor. Place the originals. OPERATION GUIDE 10-17… -
Page 366
Troubleshooting 10-18 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 367: 11 Management
11 Management This chapter explains the following operations. • User Login Administration……….. 11-2 • Job Accounting …………11-13 • Checking the Counter ……….11-37 OPERATION GUIDE 11-1…
-
Page 368: User Login Administration
Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in. Access are in three levels — User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.
-
Page 369
Management Use the procedure below to enable user login administration. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. -
Page 370
Management Press the OK key. User Login appears. User Login: 1 *Off Local Authentic. ********************* Netwk Authentic. Press the key to select [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. If you select [Netwk Authentic.], enter the host Host Name: name and domain name of the authentication… -
Page 371
Management Login/Logout Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Login Log in using the procedure below. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. If the screen below appears during the operations, Login User Name perform the following login operations. -
Page 372
Management Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default login user name). The table below explains the user information to be registered. Item Description User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). -
Page 373
Management In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [User/Job Account], and then press User/Job Account ********************* the OK key. User Property Common Settings [ Exit If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. -
Page 374
Management Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter User Name: the login user name in the next screen, and then press the OK key. [ Text Press the key to select [Exit] and then l User01: press the OK key. Exit ********************* Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see… -
Page 375: Changing User Properties
Management Press the key to select [Account Name:], press Detail: [Change] (the Right Select key), select the account, and then press the OK key. Account Name: k KyoceramitaOsaka NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and [ Change ] the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is not displayed.
-
Page 376
Management In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set.]. User Login Set. ********************* Job Account. Set. Unknown ID Job [ Exit Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu User Login Set.: a b appears. -
Page 377: Add User
Management The overwrite confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List. Deleting a user Press the key to select the user you want Local User List: a b to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select l DeviceAdmin key).
-
Page 378
Management Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. -
Page 379: Job Accounting
Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. • Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts. • Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security. •…
-
Page 380: Unknown Id Job
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password.
-
Page 381
Management Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. In the screen below, enter the account ID using the Account ID: numeric keys and press the OK key. -
Page 382: Managing Accounts
Management Managing Accounts This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required. Item Description Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
-
Page 383: Default Setting
Management Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu Job Account.Set.:a b appears. Each Job Account Account. List ********************* Default Setting [ Exit Press the key to select [Account. List]. Press the OK key. Account. List appears. Account. List: k UI R&D DEP.
-
Page 384
Management Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to manage accounts. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. -
Page 385
Management Press the OK key. Account. List appears. Account. List: k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing account information Press the key to select the account whose information you want to change, and then press the Account. -
Page 386
Management Deleting an account Press the key to select the account you Account. List: want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right k UI R&D DEP. Select key). k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu Press the key to select [Delete]. -
Page 387: Apply Limit
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password.
-
Page 388: Restricting The Use Of The Machine
Management Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-20.
-
Page 389
Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item Description No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Reject Usage Restriction is applied. Use the procedure below to select a restriction method. Follow steps 1 to 7 of Managing Accounts on page 11-16. -
Page 390
Management If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit Limit Pages: number of pages in the next screen, and then press (1 — 9999999) the OK key. **123456*pages Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary. Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen Overwrite. -
Page 391
Management If user login administration is disabled, the user Login User Name authentication screen appears. Enter your login ******************* user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator Login Password: privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. -
Page 392
Management Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. 11-26 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 393
(Other) used for scanning (excludes copying). FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only) [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. -
Page 394
Management Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [User/Job Account], and then press User/Job Account ********************* the OK key. -
Page 395
Management Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu Default Setting: a b appears. Apply Limit ********************* Copy/Print Count Counter Limit [ Exit Press the key to select [Counter Limit]. Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears. Counter Limit: Copy Restriction ********************* Print Restrict. -
Page 396: Counting The Number Of Pages Printed
FAX TX Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
-
Page 397
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 398
Management To reset the counter, press the key to select Total Accounting:a b [Counter Reset]. Printed Pages Scanned Pages ********************* Counter Reset [ Exit Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Reset counter. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). -
Page 399
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 400
Management If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Copy/Print Pages:C b key to switch the counted items. Copy: If the number of output sheets is restricted by an 1234567 account management function, the upper limit on Limit:1234567 the number of output sheets is also displayed. After confirming the content, press the OK key. -
Page 401: Printing An Accounting Report
Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
-
Page 402
Management NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. In the User/Job Account menu, press the User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. -
Page 403: Checking The Counter
You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the total number of pages used. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the Sys.
-
Page 404
Management Press the key to check the count. Printed Pages: Copy: 1234567 After completing checking the count, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account. 11-38 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 405: Appendix
Appendix • Optional Equipment ………Appendix-2 • Character Entry Method……..Appendix-5 • Paper ……………Appendix-9 • Specifications ……….Appendix-18 • Glossary…………Appendix-23 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-1…
-
Page 406: Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine. Document Processor Expansion Memory Paper Feeder Document Processor (DP-110) Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying. For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-45.
-
Page 407
NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory Precautions for Handling the Memory Module Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. -
Page 408
Remove the memory module from its package. Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket, carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place. Then, push down the memory module to secure. -
Page 409: Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters. Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters. 1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s). 2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.
-
Page 410: Selecting Type Of Characters
Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters, the following three types are available: To enter alphabets. To enter numerals. Symbols To enter symbols. In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right File name input: Select key) to select the type of characters you want to enter.
-
Page 411: Entering Characters
Entering Characters After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters. Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed. Entry mode Available characters Alphabetic/Symbol .
-
Page 412
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it. If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there, spaces are automatically entered in between. -
Page 413: Paper
Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. Cassette Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, 250 (80g/m Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1 B6, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K,…
-
Page 414
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50″ or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02″… -
Page 415: Basic Paper Specifications
Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular (‘dry’) copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
-
Page 416: Choosing The Appropriate Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine.
-
Page 417
Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. -
Page 418: Special Paper
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
-
Page 419
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper. Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. -
Page 420
Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. -
Page 421
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output. Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Item Specifications Top sheet weight… -
Page 422: Specifications
Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. Machine Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, single drum system Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal) Original Feed System Fixed…
-
Page 423
Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Paper Front 250 sheets (80 g/m Capacity Cassette Multi Purpose 50 sheets (80 g/m , plain paper, A4/Letter or less) Tray Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments) -
Page 424
Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Power During printing 479.9 W (U.S.A./Canada), 470 W 498 W (U.S.A./Canada), 484 W Consump- (European countries) (European countries) tion During standby 83.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 83.4 W 91.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W (European countries) (European countries) Low power 82.6 W (U.S.A./Canada), 82.3 W… -
Page 425
Scanner Item Description Operating System Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 System requirements IBM PC/AT compatible CPU: Celeron 600Mhz or higher RAM: 128MB or more HDD free space: 20MB or more Interface: Ethernet Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi… -
Page 426: Environmental Specifications
(W) × (D) × (H) Weight 3 kg or less Environmental Specifications Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Time to Low Power mode (default 2 minutes setting) Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 15 minutes Recovery time from Low Power mode 10 seconds or less…
-
Page 427: Glossary
Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer’s Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data.
-
Page 428
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption. KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language) Kyocera’s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. Multi Purpose (MP) Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels. -
Page 429
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet. PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly- functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. -
Page 430
TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission. -
Page 431: Index
Index 2-in-1 Mode 4-11 4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Page Boundary Lines 4-13 COMMAND CENTER 2-25 Connecting LAN Cable 2-5 Numerics Power Cable 2-7 USB Cable 2-7 1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-7 Connection Method 2-3 Continuous Scan Copy 4-15 Send 5-16 Accessibility Appendix-23 Copy Adjusting Density 5-13 Adjusting Density 3-10 Auto 3-10…
-
Page 432
File Format 8-36 Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-18 File Name 8-39 Entry Original Image 8-32 Body 5-18 Original Orientation 8-30 File Name 4-18, 5-17 Scan Resolution 8-33 Subject 5-18 Zoom 8-38 Error Handling 8-28 Default Gateway Appendix-23 Error Messages 10-5 Default Screen 8-5 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Density Adjustment… -
Page 433
Raw Port 8-135 SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-135 KPDL Appendix-24 SNMP 8-135 TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-129 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-129, 8-132, 8-133 Label Appendix-16 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Operation Panel 1-2 Login 3-6, 11-5 Option Logout 3-6, 11-5 Document Processor Appendix-2 Low Power Mode 3-5 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Low Power Timer 8-108 Overview Appendix-2… -
Page 434
Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-14 Status Page 8-81 Specifications Appendix-11 Transmission Result Reports 8-85 Weight 8-17 Product Library 2-2 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Paper Jam 10-11 Cassette 1 10-12 Quick Setup Screen Cassette 2 10-12 Changing Registration 8-60, 8-62, 8-66 Document Processor 10-16 Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-15 Jam Location Indicators 10-11 Multi Purpose Tray 10-15… -
Page 435
Printer 8-69 Printing Documents 6-2 Send 8-62 Removing 6-6 Sleep 3-5 Saving Documents 6-4 Slit Glass User Login Administration 11-2 Cleaning 9-2 Adding 11-6 SMTP Appendix-25 Changing Properties 11-9 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Enabling/Disabling 11-2 Specifications Login 11-5 Document Processor Appendix-22 Logout 11-5 Environmental Specifications Appen- Unknown login user name Job 11-11… -
Page 436
Index-6 OPERATION GUIDE… -
Page 439
First Edition 2009.7…